Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Specifications

2007 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 8
Rear Seats ............................................. 17
Safety Belts ............................................ 19
Child Restraints ...................................... 43
Airbag System ........................................ 72
Restraint System Check
......................... 90
Features and Controls ................................ 93
Keys ....................................................... 95
Doors and Locks .................................. 104
Windows ............................................... 109
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 111
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
..................................... 114
Mirrors .................................................. 129
OnStar® System ................................... 133
Storage Areas
...................................... 137
Sunroof
................................................ 144
M
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ....
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............
Audio System(s) ...................................
145
148
165
171
192
215
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 283
Your Driving, the Road, and Your
Vehicle .............................................. 284
Towing
................................................. 320
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
All-Wheel Drive .....................................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...
331
333
335
340
374
375
380
1
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
382
417
427
428
434
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 435
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 436
2
Customer Assistance Information ............. 455
Customer Assistance and Information ... 456
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 474
Index .......................................................... 477
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
be have all of them. For example, more than
one entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name EQUINOX are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at
the time it was printed. We reserve the right
to make changes after that time without notice.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15860877 A First Printing
©
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 8
Manual Seats ................................................ 8
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9
Power Seat ................................................... 9
Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10
Heated Seats .............................................. 10
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 11
Head Restraints .......................................... 13
Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 14
Rear Seats .................................................... 17
Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 17
Safety Belts .................................................. 19
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 19
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 23
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 24
Driver Position ............................................. 25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42
Child Restraints ............................................ 43
Older Children ............................................. 43
Infants and Young Children ......................... 46
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 53
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 57
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 64
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ......................... 66
Airbag System .............................................. 72
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 75
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 78
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 79
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 80
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ... 80
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 82
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 88
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 89
Restraint System Check ............................... 90
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 90
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................... 91
7
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
8
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with
your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height
adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the front of the seat cushion.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward
repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.
To lower the seat, move the lever downward
repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.
If the vehicle has a power seat, the control used
to operate it is located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat. To adjust the seat do any of the
following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
9
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of
the driver seat lower
cushion on the
inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
If your vehicle has
heated seats, the
switches are located on
the center console of the
instrument panel above
the shift lever.
The ignition must be on for the heated seats
to operate.
Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turn
the heated seat on to the high setting. Both
indicator lights will be lit. Press the switch a
second time to turn the heated seat to the low
setting. One indicator light will be lit. Press
the switch a third time to turn the heated seat off.
10
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
Driver’s Seat with Manual Recline and
Manual Height Adjuster shown
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked.
To adjust the seatback on the driver’s seat, lift the
lever on the rear outboard side of the seat and
move the seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
11
Passenger Seat with Folding Seatback
Option shown
To adjust the seatback on the front passenger’s
seat, lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat
and move the seatback to the desired position.
Then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place. If your front passenger’s seat is a flat
folding seat, you must fully raise the lever to
disengage the seatback.
12
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
13
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
button, located on the
top of the seatback, and
push the restraint down.
Passenger Folding Seatback
The front passenger’s seatback may fold flat.
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry
longer objects, such as skis, be sure any
such cargo is not near an airbag. In a
crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag
would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 75 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
14
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure
all items before driving.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat as far back as it
will go and release the bar. Try to move the
seat back and forth to make sure it is
locked into place.
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard
side of the seat, up fully and fold the seatback
forward until it disengages.
15
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks
in the folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard
side of the seat, up fully and push up on the
seatback.
2. Continue raising the seatback until the
seatback re-engages.
16
The recliner lever is also used to recline the
seatback while a passenger is seated. See Manual
Reclining Seatbacks on page 11.
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
The rear split bench seatbacks have
three available positions — folded forward,
upright, or partially reclined. Both of the seatbacks
can be moved to any of the three positions
independent of the other seatback position.
The rear bench seat can also be moved forward
and rearward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to
the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
1. Ensure all three of the safety belts are
unbuckled and the front seatbacks are
not reclined.
17
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the
seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the
lever when the seatback is in the desired
position.
To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, do
the following:
1. Lift and hold the release bar located under the
front of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
2. Lift the lever located on the top of the
seatback to release the seatback.
3. Fold the seatback forward to the desired
position.
18
3. Release the bar.
4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure
the seat is locked in place.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt
Reminder Light
on page 173.
19
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
be so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
20
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
21
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
22
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down.
And your chance of being conscious during
and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should
I have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
23
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
24
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 43 or Infants and Young
Children on page 46. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
25
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 34.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
26
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
27
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
32
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
33
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it up or down without squeezing
the release buttons to make sure it has locked into
position.
34
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 25.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for the following.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop.
35
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others in the vehicle who
are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
36
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make
sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 42.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
37
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
38
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outboard
passenger position in the rear seat. Here is how to
install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the
back of the seatback.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle. For outboard seating positions, when
the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate
up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the
guide loop on the side wall.
39
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then,
place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of
the guide.
40
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 36. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide back onto
its storage clip located on the seatback.
41
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 91.
42
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should
fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top
of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
43
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
page 39. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts
provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
44
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
45
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
46
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
CAUTION:
(Continued)
47
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds
of restraints available for children with
special needs.
48
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
49
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
50
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system
is a portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in the
vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child
restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can
also help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in
a booklet, or both.
51
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make
sure the child restraint is properly
installed in the vehicle using the vehicle’s
safety belt or LATCH system, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
52
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 57 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Make sure the child
is properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.
53
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
54
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off. Here
is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint
in the rear seat, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint
or the size of the child restraint, you may not
be able to access certain safety belt assemblies or
LATCH anchors for additional passengers or
child restraints.
(Continued)
55
Configurations for Use of Two Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint
using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint
using LATCH
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint
using LATCH
A. Child restraint
using LATCH
B. No occupant
recommended
C. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
56
Configurations for Use of Three Child
Restraints
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,
you must also use either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the child restraint.
A child restraint must never be installed using only
the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments. The following
explains how to attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
57
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a top tether.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
58
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has exposed metal
anchors located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating
position are located on the back of the rear
seatback. You may need to adjust the rear
compartment storage panel/cover in the rear cargo
area to access the anchors. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached.
59
There is no place to attach the top tether in this
position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 53
for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
60
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
61
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the
proper anchor location.
This system is designed to make installation of
child restraints easier. When using lower anchors,
do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead
use the vehicle’s anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to
secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
62
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. You may need to adjust the rear
compartment storage panel/cover in
the rear cargo area to access the
anchors. See Rear Compartment
Storage Panel/Cover on page 140.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the head restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the head restraint
and route the tether
under the head restraint
and in between the head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
63
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 57.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
64
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
65
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 57.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
For outboard seating positions, when the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the
stitching on the safety belt, near the upper anchor
on the side wall.
66
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 53.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 82 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 175 for more information on this including
important safety information.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
67
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
CAUTION:
68
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 8 or Power Seat on page 9.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 57.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 57 if the child
restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 82. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even
if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Manual Seats on page 8 or Power
Seat on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to RUN or START.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 175.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
69
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
70
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You
should not be able to pull more of the belt from
the retractor once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle if one is available and check with
your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back
all the way. The safety belt will move freely again
and be ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
71
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted side
impact airbags designed for either side impact or
rollover deployment. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags are available for the driver and the
passenger seated directly behind the driver and
for the right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the airbag covering on the headliner near the
driver’s and right front passenger’s window.
Even if you have no right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag
in the right side of the instrument panel. Do
not place cargo in front of this airbag.
72
{CAUTION:
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In
a crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag
would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 75 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy
in moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal or in rear crashes. If the
vehicle is equipped with rollover capable
airbags, it has been designed to deploy
the roof-mounted side impact airbags in
the event of a vehicle rollover. Everyone
in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
(Continued)
73
74
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact
airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. If you are too close to
an inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 43 or Infants and Young Children
on page 46.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 174 for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
75
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
76
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for the
driver and the person seated directly behind
the driver, it is located in the ceiling above the
side windows.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for the
right front passenger and the person directly
behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling
above the side windows.
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between
an occupant and an airbag, and do not
attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle
by routing the rope or tie down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the path
of an inflating side impact airbag will be
blocked. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear.
77
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts,
these airbags inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full
deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes
straight into a wall that does not move or deform,
78
the threshold level for the reduced deployment is
about 11 to 16 mph (17 to 26 km/h), and the
threshold level for a full deployment is about
20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,
the airbags could inflate at a different
crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted
airbags and a rollover sensor. See Airbag System
on page 72. These “rollover capable” airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes or during a rollover. A roof-mounted side
impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.”
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
not intended to inflate in rear impacts. Both
roof-mounted rollover airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck or during a
rollover.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,
inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollover
capable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, the
sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to
roll over. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.
For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, and
related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,
the airbag modules, the inflator, and the airbags
are located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near
the side windows.
79
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate
to severe side collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags
supplement the protection provided by safety belts.
Airbags distribute the force of the impact more
evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted rollover
airbags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including many frontal or near frontal
collisions, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicles
with roof-mounted rollover airbags.
80
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbags may
still be at least partially inflated minutes after the
vehicle comes to rest. Some components of the
airbag module — the steering wheel hub for the
driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, and the area along the
ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows for
vehicles with roof–mounted side impact
airbags — may be hot for a short time. The parts
of the airbag that come into contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,
and flash the hazard warning flashers when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn
the interior lamps off, and turn off the hazard
warning flashers by using the controls for those
features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for your airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 469.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work properly. See
your dealer for service.
81
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn your
ignition key to RUN or START.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on
and off, will be visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol
for on or the symbol for off will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 175.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
82
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there is
a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
83
Here is why:
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
CAUTION:
84
(Continued)
(Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position on page 66.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle if one is available and check with
your dealer.
When the passenger’s frontal airbag has been
turned off by the passenger sensing system, the off
indicator on the instrument panel will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
85
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the right
front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
86
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for about two minutes. This will allow
the system to detect that person and then enable
the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something may
be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 174 for more on this, including
important safety information.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the
passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment
to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 89 for
more information about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. Remove any additional material from the
seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint and before a small occupant,
including a small adult, sits in the passenger
position.
87
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several
places around your vehicle. You do not want the
system to inflate while someone is working on your
vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 475.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
88
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 456.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, rollover sensor
module, instrument panel, steering wheel,
ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,
roof-mounted rollover airbag modules, or
airbag wiring can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 456.
89
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 421
for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
90
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or
the side impact airbag covering (if equipped) on
the ceiling near the side windows, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both
the airbag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s airbag, or side
impact airbag module and ceiling covering for
roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 174.
91
✍ NOTES
92
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys .............................................................. 95
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 96
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation .................................... 97
Doors and Locks ........................................ 104
Door Locks ................................................ 104
Power Door Locks ..................................... 105
Delayed Locking ........................................ 105
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 105
Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 106
Lockout Protection ..................................... 106
Liftgate ...................................................... 107
Windows ...................................................... 109
Power Windows ........................................ 110
Sun Visors ................................................ 110
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 111
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 111
PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 112
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 113
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 114
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 114
Ignition Positions ....................................... 115
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 116
Starting the Engine .................................... 116
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 118
Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 119
Parking Brake ........................................... 122
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 123
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 125
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 126
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 127
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 128
93
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 129
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 129
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® .......... 129
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass ................... 129
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass ........................................ 131
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 132
Outside Convex Mirrors ............................. 132
OnStar® System .......................................... 133
94
Storage Areas ............................................. 137
Glove Box ................................................. 137
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 137
Center Console Storage Area .................... 137
Garment Hooks ......................................... 137
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 138
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..... 140
Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 142
Table ........................................................ 142
Convenience Net ....................................... 143
Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 143
Sunroof ....................................................... 144
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
95
One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Key code information can be obtained by your
dealer. These code numbers can be used to make
new keys. Additional keys that are needed can
be made at any retail service facility provided you
have the key code information. Store this
information in a safe place, but not in your vehicle.
Have extra keys made. Your service parts
department can make extra keys for you.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
The remote keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
96
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any remote keyless entry system.
If the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter
to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 97.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)
away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can
also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of 195 feet (60 m)
away. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running. As a result, you may need to
be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were
to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 96.
97
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock the
doors and liftgate. If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps
will flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp
when the lock button is pressed again within
five seconds of the previous press of the lock
button. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 207 for additional information. Pressing the
lock button may arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 111.
Remote Keyless Entry
with Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry
without Remote Start
The following functions may be available if your
vehicle has the RKE system:
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
this feature, it may be started from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See “Remote
Vehicle Start” following, for more detailed
information.
98
K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock
the driver’s door. If the button is pressed
again within five seconds, all remaining doors,
and the liftgate, will unlock. The interior lamps
will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through
the DIC, the parking lamps will flash once to
indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 207. Pressing the
unlock button on the RKE transmitter will disarm
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 111.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn
signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound
three times. Press and hold this button for more
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will
sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm
will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or
the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition
must be in LOCK for the panic alarm to work.
The RKE transmitter is used to arm/disarm
the content theft-deterrent system. Your vehicle’s
theft-deterrent system can be programmed to
three different modes. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 111
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your dealer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters so they can
also be re-coded to match the new transmitter.
Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,
the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
The vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it. Or, see ″Relearn
Remote Key″ under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 193 for instructions on how to match
RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering
or exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by
pressing the lock or unlock button once or the
panic alarm button twice.
99
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use
care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter,
do the following:
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the
transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a
pencil or similar object to remove the old
battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing down.
Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to
be sure no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
100
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have the remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine
from outside the vehicle. See “REMOTE START”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 207
for instructions on how to enable and disable
this feature.
During a remote start, the climate control system
will turn on at the fan, temperature, and mode
settings the vehicle was set to when the vehicle
was last turned off and will also turn on the
rear window defogger.
Laws in some local communities may restrict
the use of remote starters. For example, some
laws may require a person using remote start
to have the vehicle in view when doing so.
Check local regulations for any requirements
on remote starting of vehicles.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press and release
the lock button and then press and hold the remote
vehicle start button to start the vehicle.
Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
As a result, you may need to be closer to your
vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remote
start feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
To start the engine using the remote start feature,
do the following:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter, that has a remote
vehicle start button, at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the remote vehicle start button until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for at
least four seconds, if the vehicle’s lights are
not visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
Pressing the remote start button again after the
vehicle has started will turn off the ignition.
101
3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on while the
engine is running.
4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,
repeat these steps while the engine is still
running for a 10 minute time extension.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,
and the engine is still running, turn the key to
the RUN position to drive the vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to RUN.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles with the
key is two.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the
first 10 minutes will immediately expire and
the second 10 minute time frame will start.
102
For example, if the lock button and then the
remote start buttons are pressed again after
the vehicle has been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to
run for 15 minutes.
After your vehicle’s engine has been started
two times using the remote vehicle start button,
the vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned to
RUN and then back to LOCK using the key before
the remote start procedure can be used again.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote
start, do any of the following:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the
parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition
switch and turn the switch to RUN and then
back to LOCK.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are
not closed.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system
malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
used. The maximum number of remote starts
or remote start attempts between ignition
cycles with the key is two.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start ready
feature. This feature allows your dealer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,
your RKE transmitter will have extended range
that will allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle
from approximately 195 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start
feature are shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system
may be enabled or disabled through the DIC.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 207 for additional
information.
103
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children,
can easily open the doors and fall out
of a moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are a couple of ways to manually lock or
unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door.
From the inside, use the lock control on the door.
104
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s doors.
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door
or liftgate is open when you try to lock the
doors with the remote keyless entry (RKE)
transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
doors will not lock, and the theft-deterrent system
will not arm until all the doors are closed and
ten seconds have passed.
The delayed locking feature can be programmed
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 207.
K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the
unlock symbol.
Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and press
the lock symbol to lock all of the doors.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock feature
which enables you to program the power door
locks through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 207
for more information on DIC programming.
105
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors
from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on
the inside edge of
each rear door. You
must open the rear
doors to access them.
To open a rear door while the security lock is on,
do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the front door power lock
switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to the
vertical position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
Lockout Protection
To set the security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear
door security lock label and turn it to the
horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
106
If you press the power door lock switch when the
key is in the ignition and any door is open, all
the doors will lock and only the driver’s door will
unlock. Be sure to remove the key from the ignition
when locking your vehicle.
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
doors and the key is in the ignition, a chime
will sound three times. All passenger doors will
lock, but the driver’s door will remain unlocked.
Liftgate
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• If you have air outlets on or under the
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate or liftglass open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the
body and the liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force
outside air into your vehicle. See
“Climate Control System” in the Index.
CAUTION:
instrument panel, open them all the
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 127.
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice or use the power door lock switch.
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter or use the power door lock switch.
The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle located
in the center of the liftgate.
When closing the liftgate, use the molded handles
to pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closed
until it latches.
(Continued)
107
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power
The liftgate is equipped with an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage,
the liftgate will not open.
To open the liftgate
if this happens,
remove the interior
trim plug located
at the base of
the liftgate from
inside the vehicle.
108
Use a tool to push
the service release
lever located on
the latch until you
hear or feel the
gate release.
The liftgate can now be opened and closed
manually. You will need to use this procedure to
open the liftgate until the power is restored.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
109
Power Windows
the switch part way, and the driver’s window will
open a small amount. Press the switch down
all the way down and release it and the window
will go down automatically.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of the switch.
Window Lockout
The window switches for all doors are located on
the center console. A window switch for each
rear window is located on each rear door.
To open a window, press the bottom of the switch.
To close a window, press the top of the switch.
The power windows operate when the ignition
is RUN or ACC (Accessory), or while in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 116.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered
without holding the switch. Press the bottom of
110
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from
operating the windows. Press the lockout button,
located with the power window switches, to turn the
feature on and off. The window switch has a light
that will come on when the switch is active.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down.
You can also detach the driver’s sun visor from
the center mount and slide it along the rod
from side-to-side for greater coverage.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on
both the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be
opened with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The power door lock switches are disabled
and the doors remain locked. You must use your
remote keyless entry transmitter or your key to
unlock the doors when the system is armed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you
are using the remote keyless entry transmitter,
the door does not need to be open.
The alarm system will arm when you use either
power lock switch to lock the doors while any door
or the trunk is open and the key is removed
from the ignition.
3. Close all doors.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone
tries to enter the vehicle without using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or a key or turns the
ignition on with an incorrect key. The horn
will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash
for approximately two minutes.
Arming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors,
if the key is not in the ignition.
111
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when you use
your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock
the doors.
The first time a remote unlock command is
received, three flashes will be seen and three horn
chirps heard to indicate an alarm condition has
occurred since last arming.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when you use your
key to unlock the doors or insert your key in
ignition and turn it from the LOCK position.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
112
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder
in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not
have to do anything special to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you transition the key
to RUN, ACC or START from the LOCK position.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents
the vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light
on the instrument panel comes on when trying
to start the vehicle, the key may have a damaged
transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start with the other key,
your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does
start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer
who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new
key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder
to “learn” the transponder value of a new
or replacement key. Up to nine additional keys
may be programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+
to have keys made and programmed to the
system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.
At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 429.
113
To program the new additional key do the
following:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in
the ignition and start the engine. If the engine
will not start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn
it to the RUN position within five seconds of
removing the original key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key
has been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your
engine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
may not be working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
114
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 322 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and
more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load
can be gradually increased.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns
Ignition Positions
With the key in the
ignition switch, you can
turn it to four different
positions. A warning
tone will sound if
you open the driver’s
door when the key
has not been removed
from the ignition.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from
the ignition switch could cause damage
or break the key. Use the correct key and turn
the key only with your hand. Make sure the
key is in all the way. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
9 (LOCK): You will only be able to remove your
key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK
unless the shift lever is in PARK (P).
ACC (Accessory): This position operates some
of your electrical accessories.
to after you start your engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in the RUN position when
the engine is running. But even when the engine
is not running, you can use RUN to operate
your electrical accessories and to display some
warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the
key in the ACC or RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch will return to RUN for
normal driving.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
115
The battery could be drained if you leave the
key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after
it has been parked for an extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio,
power windows and sunroof to continue to work
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned
off or the driver’s door is opened.
All these features will work when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACC.
Starting the Engine
Place the transaxle in the proper gear.
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position -- this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
116
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in the neutral position
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all
the way down. That is a safety feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will
go down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transaxle gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components. If
the ignition key is turned to the START position,
and then released when the engine begins
cranking, the engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held
in START for many seconds, cranking will be
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to
the ACC or LOCK position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking motor,
and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too
much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to allow the cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of the key
and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transaxle
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates
all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
117
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold
weather 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged
in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C),
use of the coolant heater is not required. Your
vehicle may also have an internal thermostat
in the plug end of the cord. This will prevent
operation of the engine coolant heater when
the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)
as noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The cord is located on the passenger’s
side of the engine compartment, near the
radiator.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
118
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some
other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,
we ask that you contact your dealer in the area
where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer
can give you the best advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console.
When you change gears, the different shift positions
will display on the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for the
automatic transaxle.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 123.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 322.
119
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You
must fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is
in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 125.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of snow, ice, or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 314.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
{CAUTION:
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.
120
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine
is running at high speed is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive
gear while your engine is running at high
speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from
NEUTRAL (N) while the vehicle is moving
could damage the transaxle. Make sure
the vehicle is stopped before shifting from
NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transaxle. It provides the best fuel
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power
for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 299.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used
for normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle
speed without using your brakes for slight
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If constant
upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving
up steep hills, this position can be used to prevent
repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing
a trailer, so that there is less shifting between
gears.
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually
using your brakes. You can use it on very steep
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever
is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into
LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.
If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold
the vehicle in place.
121
Transaxle Overheating
If the transaxle fluid temperature rises above
284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light will flash. See
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on
page 181 for more information. When the transaxle
overheats it will go into a protection mode and
will default shift into fifth gear if in the DRIVE (D)
position, or second gear if in the LOW (L)
position. Continue driving the vehicle in either
position depending on the required vehicle speed
and load. Once the fluid temperature lowers to
the normal temperature range, the transaxle
will return to the normal shift patterns. Towing or
driving on long hills can cause the transaxle
fluid temperature to be higher than normal. If the
transaxle fluid temperature will not cool, you
may need to pull over and check the transaxle
fluid level. You should also check the engine
coolant temperature. If it is hot, see Engine
Overheating on page 355.
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located to the right of
the driver’s seat.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and pull up on the parking brake lever.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
122
Make sure to release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is
moving at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime will
activate to remind you to release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
(Continued)
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 322.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)
position by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing it all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you.
If you can leave your vehicle with the
ignition key in your hand, your vehicle
is in PARK (P).
123
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
124
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever
away from PARK (P) without first pushing the
button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find
it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 123.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to
have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever — push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P), as you maintain brake
application. Then, press the button on the shift
lever and move the shift lever into the gear
you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still
cannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to LOCK.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end
of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the
desired drive gear.
5. Have your vehicle fixed as soon as
you can.
125
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
126
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming
into your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
127
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 127.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is
at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park
in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 310.
128
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 123.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling
a trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 322.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
To adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror to
a position that allows you see to out of the back
window. To adjust the height of the mirror, adjust
the arm that connects the mirror to the windshield.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
If your vehicle has this feature, an automatic
dimming mirror automatically dims to the proper
level to minimize glare at night from lights
behind your vehicle. For more information about
OnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 133.
To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the
lever toward you to the night position.
The mirror includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face that shows the compass
reading.
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar®
O (On/Off): Press this button to operate the
To adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror
to a position that allows you see to out of the back
window. To adjust the height of the mirror, adjust
the arm that connects the mirror to the windshield.
To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the
lever toward you to the night position.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe
to OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 133
for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
automatic dimming and compass features.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
each time the ignition is started. A light near the
on/off button will come on to indicate the automatic
dimming is on.
Press and hold the on/off button for about
four seconds to manually turn the automatic
dimming function on or off.
129
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once briefly to turn the
compass on or off.
Compass Display
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs
to be calibrated. For more information, see
“Compass Calibration” later in this section.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
the mirror’s compass could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving
the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance if
you live outside of zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will also be necessary to
adjust for compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
130
2. Press the on/off button approximately seven
seconds until the word ZONE appears in the
display. The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Press and release the on/off button until the
desired zone number appears in the display.
After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked
in and the compass display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
Compass Calibration
Cleaning the Mirror
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the
display does not show a compass heading
(N for North, for example), there may be
a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount,
magnetic note pad holder, or a similar
magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct
heading and the compass zone variance
is set correctly.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in
the mirror compass windows. If CAL is not
displayed, push the on/off button for approximately
12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Compass
If the vehicle has this feature, the automatic
dimming mirror automatically dims to the proper
level to minimize glare at night from lights
behind your vehicle.
The mirror also has a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror that shows the compass
reading.
O On/Off: Press this button to operate the
automatic dimming and compass features.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass on page 129 for information
on Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation and
Compass Operation.
131
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
power mirrors are
located on the
instrument panel.
Outside Convex Mirrors
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved, creating a wider area
of vision for the driver.
{CAUTION:
To adjust the mirrors, do the following:
1. Move the selector switch to the left or right to
choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
2. Press the corresponding edges of the round
control pad to move each mirror to the
desired direction.
Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a
little of your vehicle, and the area behind your
vehicle.
132
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply
into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle
on your right. Check your inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting
OnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®
Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button
to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in
your glove box or visit onstar.com.
133
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
•
•
•
•
•
134
(If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
or OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation
(If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is
fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be
used with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a
Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the
OnStar® Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca,
or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing
the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owners Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 280 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used
to dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to
dial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
135
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in
that area. OnStar® service also cannot work
unless you are in a place where the wireless
service provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available
in that place as well.
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light
next to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means
that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by a dealer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar® subscription has expired. You can
always press the OnStar® button to confirm
that your OnStar® equipment is active.
136
Your Responsibility
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area
Glove Box
Your vehicle may have a center console armrest
with storage area. Use the lever on the front of
the console to open it.
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the
left and pull the glove box door down until it
stops and is fully open.
Cupholder(s)
Garment Hooks
Your vehicle has a garment hook located on
the rear headliner of the vehicle.
There are two cupholders located at the lower
front of the center console armrest and a molded
cupholder on the floor of the center console.
To use the cupholders on the armrest, pull the
tray forward. There are two cupholders located at
the rear of the center console. Pull downward
on the lid to use the cupholders.
137
Luggage Carrier
These let you load some things on top of your
vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer
than the luggage carrier.
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier — like paneling,
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage
your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top
of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side
rails attached to the roof, sliding crossrails, if
equipped, and places to use for tying things down.
138
The roof rack crossrails can be locked in
four positions only.
Press the lever down and align the crossrails
on both sides with the holes on the siderails.
Move the crossrail by hand. There will be a
notable click as the pins align into the holes
locking the crossrail into place.
To reposition the crossrail, pull up on the end
levers of the crossrail to the upright position.
This will release the pins from the holes in the
siderail. You will be able to move the crossrail
into a new position.
Make sure lever is in the down position, and
that you are not able to slide the crossrail with
your hand when properly in place.
139
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it
rests on the slats as far forward as possible
and against the side rails, making sure to
fasten it securely.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargo
cover feature. The panel/cargo cover can be
adjusted into three positions.
Do not stand on plastic lower body panel when
loading cargo on the luggage carrier.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 315.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are
driving, check now and then to make sure
the luggage carrier crossrails are locked and
cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, lock one
crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails
and lock the other crossrail above the opening
of the rear door to reduce wind noise.
There may also be a flip panel towards the front of
the cargo cover. You may have to move this panel
upward in order to gain access to the cargo cover.
140
{CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the
adjustable panel when it is in the upper
(cargo cover) or center positions, during
a sudden vehicle movement or a crash,
those things could be thrown around
in the vehicle. You or others could be
injured. When it is in the upper or center
position, always secure any cargo on
the floor beneath the panel/cover.
To use the panel in the lower position, do the
following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock
it in place.
The panel can be used in this position if you
need additional space above the panel. Place
the cargo on top of the panel in this position.
To use the panel in the center position, do the
following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
middle guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back
of the panel to lock it in place.
The panel can be used in this position when
you have to place a flat or spare tire in the
rear cargo area.
141
To use the panel in the upper position, do the
following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
top guides.
Table
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back
of the panel to lock it in place.
This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear
area. The panel may be installed either carpet
or plastic side up. The panel may also be used as
a table in this position. See Table on page 142
for more information.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest
that contains two cupholders. To access the
cupholders, pull the armrest down from the
rear seatback.
142
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargo
cover that also functions as a table. The maximum
load for the table is 100 lbs. distributed (45 kg).
To set up the table, do the following:
1. With the adjustable panel in the upper
position pull rearward to position it for use
as a table. The plastic side should be up.
2. Turn the knob to release the leg from the
plastic side of the table and turn the leg
outward.
3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker
at the rear edge of the vehicle.
Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the
liftgate lock striker.
Notice: Driving with the panel extended into
the table position could damage your vehicle.
Always have the panel in the stored position
while you are driving.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a rear compartment net to
prevent items from rolling under the rear seat.
There may also be four convenience net tie-downs.
Two tie-downs are located on the side trim just
behind the rear seat and the other two are located
on the floor at the rear of the cargo area.
Cargo Tie Downs
There are cargo tie-downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you to strap cargo in and keep
it from moving.
Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of
the table could damage it. Always be sure that
the items that are placed on the surface of
the table are of moderate temperature.
There are four hooks located on the table that can
be used for grocery bags.
143
Sunroof
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, the
controls to operate it are located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror. The ignition must
be in RUN or ACC, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active, to operate the
sunroof. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 116 for more information.
To express-open the
sunroof glass panel
and sunshade, press
the switch rearward
and release it.
144
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open,
press the switch rearward again. The sunshade
cannot be closed with the sunroof open.
To close the sunroof, press forward and hold the
switch until the sunroof stops, lifts and seals
at the back of the sunroof glass. Press forward
on the switch again, to make sure the sunroof is
fully closed
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down
on the front of the switch. Push up on the front
of the switch to close it.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 148
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 150
Other Warning Devices ............................. 150
Horn .......................................................... 150
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 151
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 151
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 152
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 152
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 153
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 153
Windshield Washer .................................... 154
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 155
Cruise Control ........................................... 155
Headlamps ................................................ 158
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 159
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 159
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 160
Fog Lamps ................................................ 160
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 161
Dome Lamp .............................................. 161
Entry Lighting ............................................ 161
Map Lamps ............................................... 162
Cargo Lamp .............................................. 162
Electric Power Management ...................... 162
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 163
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 164
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 165
Climate Controls ......................................... 165
Climate Control System ............................. 165
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 169
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 169
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 171
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 172
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 173
Trip Odometer ........................................... 173
Tachometer ............................................... 173
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 173
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 174
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 174
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 175
Battery Warning Light ................................ 178
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 178
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 180
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................ 181
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light ........................................ 181
145
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 182
Tire Pressure Light .................................... 182
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 183
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 186
Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 187
Security Light ............................................ 188
Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 188
Cruise Control Light .................................. 188
Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 188
Highbeam On Light ................................... 189
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .................... 189
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light .................. 190
Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 190
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 190
Service Vehicle Soon Light ........................ 191
Fuel Gage ................................................. 191
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 192
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 192
DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 193
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 198
DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 207
146
Audio System(s) ......................................... 215
Setting the Time
(Without Date Display) ........................... 216
Setting the Time
(With Date Display) ................................ 217
Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 219
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 224
Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 235
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 253
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player) ........................................... 260
XM Radio Messages ................................. 267
Navigation/Radio System ........................... 269
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 269
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 279
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 280
Radio Reception ........................................ 281
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 282
Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 282
Multi-Band Antenna ................................... 282
✍ NOTES
147
Instrument Panel Overview
148
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 169.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 172.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See
Windshield Wipers on page 153.
E. Driver Information Center Controls. See
DIC Operation and Displays on page 193.
F. Hazard Warning Flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 150.
G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 175.
H. Rear Window Wiper/Washer Buttons. See
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 155. Fog
Lamps Button. See Fog Lamps on page 160.
I. Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 132.
J. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 161.
K. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control
on page 155.
L. Tilt Wheel. See Tilt Wheel on page 151.
M. Horn. See Horn on page 150.
N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 280.
O. Audio System. See Audio System(s)
on page 215.
P. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 123.
Q. Traction Control System (TCS) Button. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 291.
R. Power Window Switches. See Power
Windows on page 110.
S. Climate Control System. See Climate
Control System on page 165. Heated Seat
Buttons (If Equipped). See Heated Seats
on page 10.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 137.
149
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
150
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel that allows you to
adjust the steering wheel.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 152.
The lever to tilt the steering wheel is located on
the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and push
the lever down. Then, move the steering wheel
to a comfortable position and pull the lever
up firmly to lock the column in place.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
on page 152.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 153.
• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps
on page 158.
151
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the
instrument panel
cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete the lane change. The lever will return
by itself when you release it.
152
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 429 and for burned-out bulbs.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to
high, push the turn signal lever away from you.
To change from high beam to low beam, pull the
turn signal lever towards you. To flash the
high beams from low beam, pull the turn signal
lever all the way towards you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you
that you want to pass.
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull
the turn signal/multifunction lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
Windshield Wipers
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If the wiper blades
are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thaw
them. If the blades do become damaged, install
new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 380.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools
down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an
overload.
Use the lever on the right side of the steering
column to operate the windshield wipers.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position
for steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to this
position for steady wiping at low speed.
153
& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to set
a delay between wipes.
6 (Delay Adjustment): Move the lever to the
delay position to choose a delayed wiping cycle.
Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longer
delay or up for a shorter delay.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off
the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to
mist and release for a single wiping cycle.
The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe and
then return to the original position. If more
wipes are needed, hold the lever on mist longer.
154
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
There is a button marked with the windshield
washer symbol at the end of the windshield wiper
lever. Press this button to spray washer fluid
on the windshield. The wipers will run for a few
cycles to clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed. For more wash
cycles, press and hold the button longer.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The rear wiper and rear wash buttons are located
on the instrument panel above the audio system.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Z (Rear Wiper): Press this button to turn the rear
wiper on and off. When the wiper is on it will run
continuously at a preset speed.
Y (Wash): Press this button to spray washer fluid
on the rear window. The window wiper will also
come on. Release the button when enough
fluid has been sprayed on the window. The rear
wiper will run a few more cycles after it is released.
If the rear wiper function was already on, prior
to pressing the wash button, it will stay on until the
wiper button is pressed again.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid
that is in the windshield washer reservoir.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 364.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
155
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise
Setting Cruise Control
control system on and off. The indicator light is on
when cruise control is on and turns off when
cruise control is off.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
+RES (Resume): Press this button to resume a
set speed and to accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed and
to decrease the speed.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
The cruise control
buttons are located
on the left side of
the steering wheel.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on after the cruise control
has been set to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
Get up to the speed you want.
Press the SET− button and release it.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
156
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 291. When road conditions allow,
the cruise control can be used again.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brakes. This
shuts off the cruise control. The cruise symbol
in the instrument panel cluster will also go
off indicating cruise is no longer engaged.
To return to your previously set speed, you do
not need to go through the set process again.
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, press the +RES button on your steering
wheel. The vehicle will go back to the previous
set speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• Press and hold the +RES button on the
steering wheel until you reach your new
desired speed, then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small amounts,
press the +RES button. Each time you do
this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the
steering wheel until the desired lower speed
is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push
the SET− button on the steering wheel
briefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
157
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
will slow down to the cruise control speed you set
earlier. However, if you use the accelerator to
increase the vehicle’s speed for approximately
60 seconds, cruise control will disengage.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon your speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you may have to step on the accelerator pedal
to maintain your vehicle’s speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to limit the vehicle’s speed. Of course,
applying the brakes ends cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
158
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned
off, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following
positions:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Turn the
control to this position to put the headlamps
in automatic mode. Automatic mode will turn
the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how
much light is available outside of the vehicle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are
required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to
this position to turn on the parking lamps together
with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off
and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
The DRL system will make your low-beam
headlamps come on at a reduced brightness in
daylight when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in the automatic
position.
• The transaxle is not in PARK (P).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps
will be on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps will not be on.
The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
159
When you turn the exterior lamp band to the
headlamp position, your low-beam headlamps will
come on. The other lamps that come on with
your headlamps will also come on.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular
lamps will go off, and your low-beam headlamps
will come on to the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the
shift lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until
you move the shift lever out of PARK (P).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the exterior
lamps control is in the automatic position, the
headlamps will come on automatically. See
Headlamps on page 158.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on top of
the instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered,
or the headlamps will be on when you do not
need them.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
160
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps
for better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
The button for your fog
lamps is located on the
center console above
the radio.
To use the fog lamps, the parking lamps or
low-beam headlamps must be on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The fog lamp button will be lit when the lamps are
on. The Fog lamps will go off whenever you
turn the high-beam headlamps on. When the
high-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps
will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
This feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
The dome lamp switch has three positions.
The control for this
feature is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
steering column.
9 (Off): The lamp will not come on as long as
the switch is in this position.
AUTO (Auto): The lamp will come on when a
door is opened. See Entry Lighting on page 161.
R (On): The lamp will stay on as long as the
switch is in this position.
Entry Lighting
Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down
to dim them.
If the dome lamp is in the AUTO position, the
dome lamp and the cargo lamp inside your vehicle
will come on when any door is opened. In
addition, the light will come on when the remote
keyless entry unlock button is pressed. It will
stay on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened.
After the door is opened the light will remain
on and stay on for 20 seconds after the doors are
closed, or until you put the key in the ignition
and turn the key to RUN.
161
Map Lamps
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear
compartment, and is controlled by the dome
lamp. See Dome Lamp on page 161.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
Your vehicle may have lamps located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror. Push on the
lens in the lamp to turn them on and off.
162
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC),
you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will
be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for
all vehicles. This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast enough
at idle to produce all the power that is needed
for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at
the highest levels of corrective action, this
action may be noticeable to the driver.
If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that
the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as
possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 198.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed
to protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
will automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This will avoid draining the battery. This vehicle also
has a retained accessory power feature. If the radio
is on, it will turn off after 10 minutes or if any door
on the vehicle is opened. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 116.
163
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to
connect electrical equipment such as a cellular
phone or CB radio.
The accessory power outlets located in front of
the center console storage area, at the rear of
the center console, and the vehicle may have
one located in the rear cargo area.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged
into a power outlet, the battery may drain
causing your vehicle not to start or damage
to the battery. This would not be covered
by the warranty. Always unplug all electrical
devices when turning off your vehicle.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlets and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power outlet.
164
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not use equipment exceeding maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray and
cigarette lighter. The ashtray can be placed
into the front console cupholders.
Climate Control System
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away
from the heating element when it is hot. Damage
from overheating may occur to the lighter or
heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do
not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Do not use equipment exceeding maximum
amperage rating of 15 amperes.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle.
Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
Operation
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
165
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
fan speed. In any setting other than off, the fan will
run continuously with the ignition on. To turn off
the air completely, turn the fan to 0 and select the
recirculation button.
Use the right knob to select from the
following modes:
There is one position between each mode to finely
adjust airflow position.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and
then directs the remaining air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air
to the floor outlets with some air directed to the
windshield and side windows.
The right knob may also be used to select the
defrost and defog modes that are described in
this section.
166
You can also select modes by using the following
buttons:
; (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on. When this mode is on,
outside air will circulate throughout the vehicle.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light
in the button will come on to let you know that
it is activated. The outside air mode can be used
with all modes, but it cannot be used with the
recirculation mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button on the
center knob to recirculate cabin air through
the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air
and odors from entering the vehicle or to help heat
or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
An indicator light above the symbol will come on
in this mode. Operation in this mode during periods
of high humidity and cool outside temperatures
may result in increased window fogging. If window
fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air conditioning system on or off. When
this button is pressed, an indicator light on the
button will come on to let you know the air
conditioning is activated. The air conditioning can
be selected in any mode as long as the fan
switch is on.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It
also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the
following:
1. Select the vent mode.
Using these settings together for long periods
of time may cause the air inside of the vehicle to
become too dry. To prevent this from happening,
after the air inside of the vehicle has cooled,
turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
( (Heated Seats): If your vehicle has heated
seats, see Heated Seats on page 10.
2. Select the outside air.
3. Select air conditioning.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
6. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is
below the outside temperature, select
recirculation mode for enhanced cooling.
167
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. To avoid fogging
windows on rainy and humid days at temperatures
above freezing, turn on the air conditioning
system. Also, it is best to avoid the use of the
recirculation mode, except when maximum
A/C performance is needed or for short times to
avoid exterior odors.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. When you select either of these
modes, or the floor mode which also helps defog
the windows slightly, the system runs the air
conditioning compressor and cancels recirculation
mode to dry the air; however, the recirculation light
will stay on. For best results, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield before defrosting.
168
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets,
and half to the floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light on
the button will come on to let you know that
the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will only work when
the ignition is in RUN. The rear window defogger
will stay on for about 10 minutes after the
button is pressed, unless the ignition is turned to
ACC or LOCK. If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The outside air is routed through a passenger
compartment air filter before entering the vehicle.
This filter removes certain particles from the
air, including pollen and dust particles. Reductions
in airflow, which may occur more quickly in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be
replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 439 for when to replace
the filter.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to
change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Do not use any non-GM approved hood
deflectors that could adversely affect the
performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside
of your vehicle more effectively.
169
To change the passenger compartment air filter,
use the following steps:
1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the
passenger’s side air inlet panel. It is located
in the rear of the engine compartment on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the push pins from the top and
forward edge of the passenger’s side air
inlet panel.
4. Remove the air inlet panel.
170
5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by
pressing the release tab at the inboard edge
of the filter housing.
6. Remove the filter from the vehicle.
7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
For the type of filter to use see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 449.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As you will see in the details on the following
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
171
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive
safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
172
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
The tachometer shows your engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle
needs a new odometer installed. If the new
one can be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer, then it must be. If not, then it is set at
zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer is located in the Driver
Information Center and shows how far your vehicle
has been driven since the trip odometer was
last reset. For more information see DIC Operation
and Displays on page 193.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the solid red area, your vehicle
could be damaged. The damages would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine in the solid red area.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts, unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
173
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 82 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
174
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
airbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should
go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are
driving, your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol, to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
175
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there
is a label on your sun visor that says, “Never
put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great if the airbag deploys.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
176
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means
that the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 82 for more on this,
including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in
the right front passenger seat may not
have the protection of the frontal airbag.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 174.
177
Battery Warning Light
The battery warning light
will come on briefly as a
check, when you turn on
the ignition. Then it
should go out when the
engine is started.
If the light does not come on when you start your
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away.
This condition may indicate your battery warning
light is not functioning properly. If this light
comes on while you are driving, be sure to turn
off accessories such as the radio and climate
control system. Have your vehicle serviced right
away. The SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM message may also appear in the
Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 198 for more information.
178
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the
other part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the brake system warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
United States
Canada
The brake light is located in the instrument panel
cluster.
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come
on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake does not release
fully. A chime will also sound if the parking
brake is not fully released and the vehicle is
moving. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a
low brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 365 for
more information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 320.
179
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS),
the light will come
on when your engine is
started and stay on
for several seconds.
This is normal.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the anti-lock
portion of the brake system. If the brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 178 for more
information.
180
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the light comes on when you are driving, stop as
soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then
start the engine again to reset the system. If
the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light is not on,
you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light
is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 178 for
more information.
The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle has
a Traction Control
System (TCS)
and StabiliTrak®
warning light.
This light will come on when the TCS is limiting
wheel spin or when the StabiliTrak® system
is active. You may feel or hear the system working,
but this is normal.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on
for an extended period of time when the system
is turned on, your vehicle needs service. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 291
and StabiliTrak® System on page 292 for more
information.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on
when the engine has
overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 355 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on could cause your
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 355. Your vehicle could be damaged,
and it might not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
181
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage measures
the temperature of
the vehicle’s engine.
If the indicator needle moves into the shaded
area, the engine is too hot. A temperature indicator
light will turn on.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, and the temperature
indicator light comes on, you should pull off
the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
This light will also come on when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do
so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Tires on page 382 for more information.
This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn
on solid if a problem is detected with the Tire
Pressure Monitor system.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 391
for more information.
182
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has
a computer which
monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition,
and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 333.
183
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis
and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
184
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as soon
as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to
do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 335. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine
is warmed up.) This will be detected by the
system and cause the light to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 337.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
185
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem,
this light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on when you
are driving.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection
for lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
186
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to
show you it is working, but the light will go
out when you turn the ignition to START.
If it does not come on with the ignition on,
you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
• If the vehicle is idling at a stop sign, the light
may blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come
on for a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Change Engine Oil Light
If this light comes
on and stays on for
30 seconds, it means
that service is required
for your vehicle.
After having the oil changed you will need to
reset the light. See Engine Oil on page 344
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 439 for
more information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
187
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a theft-deterrent
system. With this
system, the security
light will flash as
you open the door if
your ignition is off.
This light will come on briefly when the vehicle
is turned on.
For more information, see PASS-Key® III+
Operation on page 113.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 160 for
more information.
188
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is
turned off. See Cruise Control on page 155 for
more information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start
the engine.
This light, along with the service vehicle soon
light, will be displayed when a noticeable reduction
in the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop
the vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait for
10 seconds and restart your vehicle. This may
correct the condition. See Service Vehicle
Soon Light on page 191 for more information.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed
when the reduced engine power light is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
The performance may be reduced until the next
time you drive your vehicle. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as possible for
diagnosis and repair.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light is located in
the center of your
instrument panel cluster.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
will come on and stay on to indicate that there may
be a problem with the drive system and service
is required. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
on page 293 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 198 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
on page 152.
189
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light
Gate Ajar Light
This light will come on
when the rear drive
system is overheating.
An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appear
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) too. This
light will turn off when the rear drive system
cools down. If this light stays on for a while, you
need to reset the light. To reset the light, turn
the ignition off and then back on again. If the
light stays on, see your dealer right away.
If this light comes on,
your liftgate is not
completely closed.
Driving with the liftgate
open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 127 for more
information.
Door Ajar Light
This light will come on
when a door is ajar.
See All-Wheel Drive on page 374 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 198
for more information.
Do not drive with a door ajar.
190
Service Vehicle Soon Light
This light will come on
if a condition exists
that may require
the vehicle to be taken
in for service.
If the light comes on, see your dealer for service
as soon as possible.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition
is on, the fuel gage
tells you about
how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but
you should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning
Light on page 192 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after
the ignition is turned on, and will go back to
empty when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 434.
191
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light below the fuel
gage will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low
on fuel. When you add fuel the light should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display
located in the center of the instrument panel
cluster. The DIC buttons are located on the
center of the instrument panel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After
a short delay, the DIC will display the information
that was last displayed before the engine was
turned off.
192
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system
problem is detected. The top of the DIC display
shows the shift lever position indicator. See
Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 119 for
more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, the DIC also
displays the outside air temperature when viewing
the trip and fuel information. If there is a problem
with the system that controls the temperature
display, the numbers will be replaced with dashes.
If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If an abnormal temperature reading is
displayed for an extended period of time, consult
your dealer. Under certain circumstances,
especially when the engine is idling, a delay
updating the temperature display is normal.
The DIC also allows some features to be
personalized. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 207 for more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located
on the center of the instrument panel.
DIC Buttons
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
scroll through the vehicle information displays
and to personalize the feature settings on
your vehicle. See “Vehicle Information Menu
Items” following and DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 207 for more information on these
displays.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information,
and set/reset buttons. The button functions
are detailed in the following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll
through the trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel
Menu Items” following for more information
on these displays.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll
through the following displays:
ODOMETER
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). This display will also show
the outside air temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
To change the DIC display to English or metric
units, see “UNITS” later in this section.
193
TRIP
AVG (Average) ECONOMY
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time. This display
will also show the outside air temperature in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is
calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was
reset. To reset this display, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
AVERAGE SPEED
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed
of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h). This average is calculated
based on the various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value. To reset
the value, press and hold the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.
194
RANGE
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number
of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the
vehicle can be driven without refueling.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving
history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions
change. For example, if driving in traffic and making
frequent stops, this display may read one number,
but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number
may change even though the same amount of fuel
is in the fuel tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL
LOW message will be displayed. See “FUEL
LEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 198 for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
scroll through the following displays:
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life remains. The
engine oil life system will alert you to change your
oil on a schedule consistent with your driving
conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 198. You
should change your oil as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil on page 344. In addition to the engine
oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 439 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 347.
UNITS
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in
this display, press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units.
195
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
BATTERY
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button until the
DIC shows FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LF ## (###)
RF ## (###). Press the vehicle information
button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LR ## (###) RR ## (###).
Press the vehicle information button until
BATTERY displays. This display shows the
current battery voltage. If the voltage is low, the
display will show LOW. If the voltage is high,
the display will show HIGH. Your vehicle’s
charging system regulates voltage based on the
state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal. See Battery Warning Light on
page 178 for more information.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected
by the system while driving, a message advising
you to check the pressure in a specific tire
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 390 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 198 for more information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes
instead of a value, there may be a problem with
your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see
your dealer for service.
196
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM. See “SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 198 for more information.
TIRE LOCATIONS
After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions.
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 391. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 396 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 198 for more information.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
This display allows you to match the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
To match a RKE transmitter to your vehicle,
do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE will display.
4. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the first transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
A chime will sound indicating that the
transmitter is matched.
5. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
6. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to LOCK.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
PERSONALIZATION
This display allows you to personalize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 207 for more information.
197
DIC Warnings and Messages
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another.
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
system, this message displays along with the
All-Wheel Drive Disabled light when the rear drive
system is overheating. This message turns off when
the rear drive system cools down. If the warning
message stays on for a while, you need to reset the
warning message. To reset the warning message,
turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the
message stays on, see your dealer right away. See
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 293 and
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light on page 190 for
more information.
Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press the set/reset button to
acknowledge that you received the messages and
to clear them from the display. Pressing any of
the DIC buttons also acknowledge and clear
any messages.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the
DIC display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any messages that
appear on the display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages will only make
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages
that can be displayed and some information
about them.
198
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the charging system
detects that the battery is being drained. You
may notice that the vehicle attempts to reduce the
drain for you by turning off accessories, such
as interior fans, rear defogger, and heated seats.
Turn off all accessories. If the vehicle is not
running, start and run the engine for at least
10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge. If the
engine is running and the condition persists,
see your dealer immediately.
BUCKLE PASSENGER SEATBELT
This message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s safety belt. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 82.
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is
buckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled
with the passenger airbag enabled, and the
vehicle is in motion. You should have the
passenger buckle their safety belt.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled
and the passenger is still unbuckled, and
the passenger airbag is enabled. If the
passenger’s safety belt is already buckled, this
message and chime will not come on.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
safety belt.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder
will be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled, this message and chime will not
come on.
This message is an additional reminder to the
Safety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument
panel cluster. See Safety Belt Reminder Light
on page 173.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required
for the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine
Oil on page 344 and Scheduled Maintenance
on page 439 for more information.
Acknowledging this message will not reset the
OIL LIFE REMAINING display. That must be
done at the OIL LIFE screen under the vehicle
information menu. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 193 and Engine
Oil Life System on page 347 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds
when the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt
is unbuckled, and the vehicle is in motion.
You should buckle your safety belt.
199
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the tire pressure
in one of the tires needs to be checked. This
message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire needs to be checked. You can receive
more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read the other messages that may have
been sent at the same time, press the set/reset
button. If a tire pressure message appears on
the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on
page 382, Loading Your Vehicle on page 315, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390. The DIC
display also shows the tire pressure values for
the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle
information button. See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 193. If the tire pressure is low,
the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 182.
This message displays when the driver’s door is
not closed properly. When this message appears,
make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
200
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the A/C operation
automatically resumes. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)
IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 355 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down.
ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)
STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 355 for more information.
This message displays along with a continuous
chime when the engine has overheated. Stop and
turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe
engine damage. See Engine Overheating on
page 355.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this
message is on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 191 and Filling the
Tank on page 337 for more information.
201
HOOD OPEN
This message displays on some vehicles when
the hood is not closed properly. When this
message appears, make sure that the hood
is closed completely. See Hood Release
on page 340.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays when the liftgate is not
closed completely. Make sure that the liftgate is
closed completely. See Liftgate on page 107.
202
OIL PRSSURE (Pressure) LOW STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
Engine Oil on page 344 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s
engine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
See Oil Pressure Light on page 186.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer
as soon as possible when this message is
displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR
FRONT/REAR OPEN
This message displays when one or more of the
passenger’s doors are not closed properly.
When this message appears, make sure that all
passenger doors are closed completely.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
your vehicle. See “LEARN REMOTE KEY” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 193 for
more information.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
detected in the air conditioning system. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 174 for more information.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
system, this message displays along with
the service all-wheel drive light if a problem occurs
with this system. See Service All-Wheel Drive
Light on page 189. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the AWD
system needs service. See your dealer.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
with the generator and battery charging systems.
Driving with this problem could drain the
vehicle’s battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical system
checked by your dealer immediately.
Connecting a battery charger to your vehicle while
the ignition is in any position other than LOCK
may cause this message to appear. If you need to
charge your vehicle, make sure that the key is
in LOCK or out of the ignition during charging.
203
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system
warning light also appears on the instrument panel
cluster when this message appears on the DIC.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 178.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible.
This message displays if there has been a
problem detected with the StabiliTrak® System.
A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 181. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 292 for more information.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
On some vehicles, this message displays when a
problem is detected with the power steering
system. When this message is displayed, you may
notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able
to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately.
If this message turns on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and
stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning
the ignition off and then back on. If this message
still stays on or turns back on again while you
are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak® System inspected by your dealer
as soon as possible.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. A fault has
been detected in the system which means that
the system is disabled and it is not protecting the
vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however,
you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer
before turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+
Operation on page 113 for more information.
204
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message displays if a part on the Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working
properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of
the four sensors are missing or inoperable,
the warning comes on in about 20 minutes.
A sensor would be missing, for example, if you
put different wheels on your vehicle without
transferring the sensors. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a problem with
the TPM. See your dealer.
This message may display and a warning light
on the instrument panel cluster may be on
after first driving the vehicle and exceeding
30 mph (48 km/h) for 30 seconds. See Traction
Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 181.
The StabiliTrak® System is not functional until
the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 292 for more information.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is not functioning properly.
A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 181 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 291 for more information.
Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as soon
as possible.
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak®
System turns off. When this message has
been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer
available to assist you with directional control
of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 292.
This message displays only while the ignition
is in RUN.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
205
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® System to turn off:
• The StabiliTrak® System is turned off by
pressing and holding the traction control
button. See StabiliTrak® System on page 292
for more information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® System failure.
See your dealer for service.
STARTING DISABLD (Disabled)
SERVICE THRTTLE (Throttle)
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled due to the electronic throttle control
system. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer
immediately.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while
you were away from your vehicle. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 111 for more information.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tire
positions. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 391. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire
or sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 396 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390
for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message only appears while the ignition is
in RUN, and will not disappear until the problem
is resolved.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 291 for more information.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message only displays while the ignition
is in RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
206
Any of the following conditions may cause the
TCS to turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the
traction control button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 291 for more
information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer
for service.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns on. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 291 for more information.
TURN SIGNAL ON
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one
preferred setting.
All of the personalization options may not be
available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the personalization
features were set when your vehicle left the
factory, but may have been changed from their
default state since then.
The personalization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change personalization preferences, use the
following procedure.
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than
about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on.
See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned
off, or a turn is completed.
207
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO
SELECT appears on the DIC display.
3. Press the set/reset button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE
SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PRK (Park) will
display. Before entering the menu, make sure
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the vehicle information button until the
PRESS V TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
display all DIC messages in English.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear.
Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAY
LANGUAGE appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear
in English.
Feature Settings Menu Items
FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear
in French.
The following are personalization features that
allow you to program settings to the vehicle:
ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appear
in Spanish.
DISPLAY ENGLISH
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
This feature will only display if a language other
than English has been set. This feature allows
you to change the language in which the DIC
messages appear to English.
208
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
AUTO LOCK
AUTO UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select when the
vehicle’s doors will automatically lock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 105
for more information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not
to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature.
It also allows you to select which doors and
when the doors will automatically unlock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 105
for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s
doors automatically lock when the doors are
closed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the vehicle speed is
above 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door
will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
209
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
REMOTE LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
You will not receive feedback when locking
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of the
doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 97 for more
information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
210
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press the lock button
on the RKE transmitter, and the horn will
sound when the lock button is pressed again
within five seconds of the previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to
this feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
REMOTE UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when unlocking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 97 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information button
to scroll through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash
when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
DELAY LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not
the locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed.
The locking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed
for up to 10 seconds after a power door lock
switch is pressed when a door is open, or after
the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed
while a door is open. The key must be out of
the ignition for this feature to work. See Delayed
Locking on page 105 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until DELAY
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
211
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors
will be delayed by 10 seconds after a power
door lock switch is pressed when a door is open,
or the lock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed while a door is open.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
If it is dark enough outside, this feature allows
you to select the amount of time you want
the exterior lamps to remain on. This happens
after the key is turned from RUN to LOCK.
This feature allows you to select whether or not
to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low
light periods after unlocking the vehicle using
the RKE transmitter.
Press the vehicle information button until EXIT
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button to access the
settings for this feature. Then press the vehicle
information button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
212
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the
exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until
the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 97
for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level
of the chime.
Press the vehicle information button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set
to a normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a
loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
turn the remote start off or on. The remote
start feature allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using your RKE transmitter.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 97
for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will
be enabled.
213
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the
personalization features back to their factory
default settings.
Press the vehicle information button until
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button to access the
settings for this feature. Then press the vehicle
information button to scroll through the following
settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The personalization
features will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The personalization
features will not be set to their factory default
settings.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
214
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the vehicle information button until
FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT
appears in the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the vehicle information
button again will return you to the beginning of
the vehicle information menu.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any
of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
• The trip/fuel DIC button is pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is
reached and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving
on page 284. By taking a few moments to read
this manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort,
as well as take advantage of its features.
While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio
system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers.
Then, when driving conditions permit, you can
tune to your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 284.
215
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
rules covering mobile radio and telephone
units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
216
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the
audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 116 for more information.
Setting the Time (Without Date
Display)
If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with a
single CD player and preset buttons numbered one
through six, the radio will have a clock button
for setting the time. You can set the time by
following these steps:
1. Press the clock button until the hour numbers
begin flashing on the display. Press the clock
button a second time and the minute
numbers will begin flashing on the display.
2. While either the hour or the minute numbers
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the time. Instead of using the tune knob, you
can also press the SEEK, FWD (forward),
or REV (reverse) buttons to adjust the time.
3. Press the clock button again until the clock
display stops flashing to set the currently
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stop
after five seconds and the current time
displayed will be automatically set.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow label.
Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,
press the pushbutton located under the desired
option to select the default. Press the clock button
again to apply the selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Setting the Time (With Date Display)
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD
player or a CD with DVD player, the radio will
have a clock button for setting the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, will increase by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the
tune knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
The date will not automatically display. The only
way to see the date is by pressing the clock button
when the radio is on. The date with display will
time out after a few seconds and go back to
the normal radio and time display.
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc
CD player, the radio will have a MENU button
instead of the clock button to set the time
and date.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) will appear on the display.
217
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option is displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY will appear on
the display.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, will increase by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the
tune knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
218
The date will not automatically display. The only
way to see the date is by pressing the MENU
button and then the clock button when the radio is
on. The date with display will time out after a
few seconds and go back to the normal radio and
time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow
label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
are displayed.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
Radio with CD (Base)
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until you hear a beep. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. When the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
The radio remembers the previous volume setting
whenever the radio is turned on. You can still
manually adjust the volume by using the
volume knob.
219
Setting Preset Stations
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until you
hear a beep. Whenever that pushbutton is
pressed and released, the station that was
set returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
EQ (Equalization): To adjust the bass or treble,
press the tune knob or EQ button until the
desired tone control label appears on the display.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the setting. The display
shows the current bass or treble level. If a station’s
frequency is weak, or if there is static, decrease
the treble.
220
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob
until the desired speaker control label appears
on the display. Turn the tune knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error appears on the display, it means
that the radio has not been configured properly
for your vehicle and it must be returned to
your dealer for service.
Loc (Locked): This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the radio display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 282 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
221
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow
to go to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track appears on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold
this pushbutton to advance playback quickly
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced
volume. Release this pushbutton to resume
playing the track. The elapsed time of the track
appears on the display.
222
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
CD tracks in random, rather than sequential
order. To use random, do the following:
1. Press this button to play tracks from the
CD you are listening to in random order.
The random icon appears on the display.
2. Press this button again to turn off random
play. The random icon disappears from
the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat one track can be
repeated (played over and over).
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press
and release the RPT button. An arrow symbol
appears on the display. Press RPT again
to turn off repeat play. When repeat is off,
the arrow symbol is no longer displayed.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the track number, elapsed time of
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off,
press this button to display the time.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and
track number appears on the display when a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message appears on
the display and/or the CD comes out, it could
be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD-R.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer,
MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player,
etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in park (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 284 for more
information on driver distraction.
223
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing
audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume of the portable player. You may need
to do additional volume adjustments from the
portable device if the volume does not go loud or
soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
may want to stop it or power it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux” appears on the display.
224
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters appear on the display. In rare
cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
is also equipped with Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV). When SCV is on, the radio volume
automatically adjusts to compensate for road and
wind noise as you speed up or slow down while
driving. That way, the volume level should sound
about the same as you drive. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low,
Med (medium), or High) to select the level of
radio volume compensation. The display times
out after approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more radio volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
225
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows
the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until you hear a beep. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
226
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station,
or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) may appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any
one of the labels and the information about that
label appears on the display.
When information is not available, No Info appears
on the display.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls (if equipped).
See Defensive Driving on page 284.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button
to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per
page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that
pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
227
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune
knob until the tone control labels appear on the
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting
by pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward) or
REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak,
or if there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep will sound and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
228
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ
button until Manual appears on the display or start
to manually adjust the bass, midrange, or treble
by pressing the tune knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels appear on the display. Continue
pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the
pushbutton positioned under the desired label.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the highlighted setting. You can also
adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the
SEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desired
levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep will sound and the level adjusts to
the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button
to display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name is displayed.
2. Press either of the two buttons below
the desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with
that category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name along
with the word Removed appears on the
display.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
The radio does not allow you to remove or add
categories while the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
229
Radio Messages
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error appears on the display, it means
that the radio has not been configured properly
for your vehicle and it must be returned to
your dealer for service.
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Locked: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 267 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
230
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. A beep will sound and Load
All Discs appears on the display.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of
the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 282 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see
“CD Messages” later in this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep will sound
and Ejecting Disc appears on the display. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears on display.
The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
231
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow
is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track appears on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold
this button to advance playback quickly within a
track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track appears
on the display.
232
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD
player. To use random, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single
CD player, insert a disc partway into the slot
of the CD player. A RDM label appears on
the display.
To play the tracks from the single CD in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc is displayed. Press the pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the LOAD button.
A beep will sound and Load All Discs appears
on the display. Insert one or more discs
partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press
the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Randomize All Discs is
displayed. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
appears on the display when a CD is in the
player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input
Device Found” appears on the display.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
If you have a radio with a single CD (MP3) or a
six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable of playing
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message appears on
the display and/or the CD comes out, it could
be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
233
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in park (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 284 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing
audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
234
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You may need to do
additional volume adjustments from the portable
device if the volume does not go loud or soft
enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
may want to stop it or power it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Input Device Found” appears on the display.
Radio with CD and DVD
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio
faceplate. The player is capable of reading the
DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video
media (DTS and DTS 2.0 are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems Inc.).
Dolby® is manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 269 for more
information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
appear on the display. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
235
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn
the system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
236
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as your
speed changes while driving. That way, the volume
level should sound about the same as you
drive. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV
setting (OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) to
select the level of radio volume compensation.
The display times out after approximately
10 seconds. Each higher setting allows
for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows
the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until you hear a beep. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station,
or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) may appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any
one of the labels and the information about that
label appears on the display.
When information is not available, No Info appears
on the display.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
237
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if the
vehicle has them. See Defensive Driving on
page 284.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
238
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that
pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,
press the tune knob until the tone control labels
appear on the display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the
tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. If a station’s frequency
is weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to
the middle position, press the pushbutton
positioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB label
for more than two seconds. A beep will sound and
the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose
bass and treble equalization settings designed
for different types of music. Your choices are pop,
rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If your radio is equipped with a Bose® audio
system, your EQ settings are either MANUAL
or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels appear on the display. Press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the highlighted setting. You can also
adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the
SEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desired
levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep will sound and the level adjusts to
the middle position.
To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the
middle position at one time, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
239
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button
to display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name is displayed.
Another way to navigate the category list
is to press the REV button or the FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below
the desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with
that category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
240
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed appears
on the display.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
The radio does not allow you to remove or add
categories while the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error appears on the display, it
means that the radio has not been configured
properly for your vehicle and it must be returned
to your dealer for service.
Locked: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 267 later in
this section for further detail.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing (loading a disc into the system,
depending on media type and format ranges from
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds
for a DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source. The CD is controlled by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks, (upper
slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the
CD deck) of the radio are compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
241
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol appears on the left side of the radio
display. As each new track starts to play, the track
number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 282 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
242
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a soft marker instead.
If an error appears on the display, see
“CD Messages” later in this section.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD eject
button to eject the CD that is currently playing
in the bottom slot. A beep will sound and Ejecting
Disc appears on the display. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc appears on the display.
The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD
eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD
eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing
in the top slot. A beep will sound and Ejecting
Disc appears on the display. Once the disc
is ejected, Remove Disc appears on the display.
The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD
eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds
have played, the previous track plays. Press
the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track appears on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold
this button to advance playback quickly within a
track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track appears
on the display.
CD currently playing.
243
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential
order. To play the tracks from the CD, press the
DVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD,
or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDM
label appears on the display. Press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Random
Current Disc appears on the display. Press
the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains safely inside the radio for future
listening or viewing entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
message showing track or chapter number
appears on the display when a disc is in either
slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device, such as a portable audio player.
If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” appears on the display.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and does not indicate “No Aux
244
Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in
this section, or Rear Seat Entertainment System
on page 269, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for
more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen
and use the remote control to navigate the
CD (tracks only) through the remote control.
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through
the speakers at one time. An audio source
is defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,
Front Aux Jack, or Rear Aux Jack.
Press the power button to turn the radio on.
The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle
speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,
FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD
slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s
front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,
the front seat passengers is able to listen to
playback from this source through the vehicle
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or Rear Seat Entertainment
System on page 269, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for
more information.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
If you have a radio with a CD and DVD, it is
capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW
disc. For more information on how to play an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3”
in the index.
CD Messages
If these messages appear on the display and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
Optical Error: If the disc was inserted
upside down.
Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or disc
EJECT problems.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with
an invalid or unknown format.
245
Using the DVD Player
Playing a DVD
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on
the remote control, by the RSA system, or by the
buttons on the radio faceplate. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment System
on page 269 for more information.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
message showing track or chapter number
appears on the display when a disc is in either
slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If
a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” appears on the display. If a disc
is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or Rear Seat Entertainment System
on page 269, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of
the appropriate region code that is printed on
the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with
most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along
with MP3 and WMA formats.
If an error message appears on the video screen
or the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”
under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on
page 269 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in
this section for more information.
246
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume. A single
press turns the radio off. Press and holding the
knob for more than two seconds turns off the entire
radio and rear seat entertainment system and
starts the parental control feature which prevents
the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control.
button to return to the start of the current track
or chapter. Press this button again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until
a subsequent press and hold of the power button
is performed (more than two seconds), or until
the driver turns the ignition off and exits the
vehicle.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a
CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station,
or to change clock or date settings, while in the
clock or date setting mode. See the information
given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the
Time (Without Date Display) on page 216 or
Setting the Time (With Date Display) on page 217,
for setting the clock and date.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this
button to go to the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
s REV (Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the CD or DVD, five times the normal
speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while
in fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press
this button again. This button may not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to
fast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays the
elapsed time and fast forwards five times the
normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
247
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or
DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,
the player automatically pulls it back in after
15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold the CD
eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing.
Press the pushbuttons located under any desired
tag option during DVD playback. See the tag
options listed below for more information.
The rear seat passenger navigates the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 269 for more
information. The Video Screen automatically turns
on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.
248
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displayed on the radio system,
to toggle between pausing or restarting playback
of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on
display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press the
play button to turn the screen on.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there may be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing
the movie automatically, press the pushbutton
located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed
on the radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer
to the on-screen instructions, if available.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the
navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through
the DVD menu. After making a selection press
the enter button. This button only operates when
using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display
directional arrows for navigating through
the menus.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when a DVD is playing
and a menu is active.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, a radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing.
Press the pushbuttons located under any desired
tag option during DVD playback. See the tag
options listed below for more information.
The rear seat operator navigates the DVD-A
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 269 for more
information. The Video Screen does not
automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through
the remote control power button.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displayed on the radio system,
to toggle between pausing or restarting playback
of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on
display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode.
q Group r: Press this button to cycle through
musical groupings on the DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display
directional arrows for navigating through
the menus.
249
e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cycle
Stopping and Resuming Playback
through audio steam formats located on DVD-A
disc. There is not any type of notification for
the customer to see through the radio display,
but VSM has a text field that shows audio stream
changing.
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the
system, press the stop button on the remote
control, or press the pushbutton located under
the stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed
on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to
something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD
AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
may not accept some paper labeled media. The
player starts loading the disc into the system
and display “Loading Disc” on the radio display.
At the same time, the radio displays a softkey
menu of option(s). Some discs automatically play
the movie while others default to the softkey
menu display which requires the Play, Enter,
or Navigation softkeys to be pressed (either by
softkey or by the rear seat passenger using
the remote control).
Loading a disc into the system, depending
on media type and format, ranges from
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to
30 seconds for a DVD.
250
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause
button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol
tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume
play from where it last stopped if the disc has not
been ejected and the stop button has not been
pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed
twice on the remote control, the disc resumes
playing at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
DVD Radio Error Messages
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the
disc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, but
not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a
short period of time. The disc is stored in the
radio. The radio does not resume play of the
disc automatically. If the RSA system is sourced
to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into
the DVD player begins to play again. In case
loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be
completed (unknown format, etc.), and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD Eject
button more than 5 seconds to force the disc
to eject.
Player Error: This message is displayed when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message appears on
the display, if the disc is inserted with the disc label
wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message appears on
the display, if the disc is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message appears on the
display, if no disc is present when the EJECT or
DVD/CD AUX button is pressed on the radio.
251
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD player, or cassette tape player, etc.
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in park (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 284 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,
the radio automatically begins playing audio
from the device over the vehicle speakers.
252
To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary
input over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux
button on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”
displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screen
must be on in order for the radio to source to rear
auxiliary.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You may need to
do additional volume adjustments from the portable
device.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
may want to stop it or power it off.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button
to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when
listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and
a message showing track or chapter number
appears on display when a disc is in either slot.
Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” appears on the display. If a disc is in
both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD
AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 269,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were
recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files
can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates:
32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are displayed by the radio when recorded using
ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads only
the uncompressed audio and ignores the
MP3/WMA files. Pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.
253
MP3/WMA Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files
on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying
to locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions may not work).
playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist
names, or a combination of a large number of
files and folders, or playlists may cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play a large number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more space on
the display and might not fully display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc
may cause the disc not to function in the
player.
254
Change playlists by using the previous and next
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no file
folders can also be played. If a CD-R contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
and 255 files, the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All
files contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions are not displayed
on a CD-R that was recorded without folders
or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then go to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder, the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R are played in the
following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode was chosen as the default display.
The new track name appears on the display.
255
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3)
as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
displays.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD
Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R
should begin playing.
256
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in
the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in
the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 282 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep will sound
and Ejecting Disc appears on the display. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears on the
display. The CD-R can be removed. If the CD-R is
not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold
the eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right
SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file appears on the display.
257
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3 file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file appears on the
display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
MP3 files on the CD-R in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD-R or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do
one of the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you are
listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays.
Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
258
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album
ID3 tag information. It may take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of
MP3 files recorded to the CD-R. The radio may
begin playing while it is scanning the disc in
the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist.
The current artist playing is shown on the
second line of the display between the arrows.
Once all songs by that artist are played, the player
moves to the next artist in alphabetical order
on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 files by
that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files
by another artist, press the pushbutton located
below either arrow button. The CD goes to
the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the
Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of
the buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album
name is displayed on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins
to play. Once all songs from that album are played,
the player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R and begin playing MP3 files
from that album.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
appears on the display when a CD is in the
player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device
such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Input Device
Found” appears on the display.
To exit music navigator mode, press the
pushbutton below the Back label to return to
normal MP3 playback.
259
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files depending on which slot the disc
is loaded into. By default the radio reads only
the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores the
MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, pressing the CAT (category) button toggles
between compressed and uncompressed audio
format, the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
260
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and
play a maximum combination of 512 files and
folders. The DVD player (upper slot) is able to
read 255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension (other file extensions may not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
Empty Directory or Folder
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists may cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc can
cause the disc not to function in the player.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT.
All files contained directly under the root directory
are accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions are not displayed
on a CD-R that was recorded without folders
or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then go to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
261
Order of Play
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless you
have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name appears on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as
the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display.
262
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3 (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,
and the CD-R should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a
softkey menu appears and allow navigation
of the disc. The menu reads left to right as
RDM (Randomize song play order), a Folder
icon with left and right arrows (to move up or
down through available folders), a PL tag if
the disc has a Playlist available, and a Music
Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling
this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the
menu as previously described.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in
the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the
same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your
CDs and DVDs on page 282 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a soft marker instead.
If an error appears on the display, see
“CD Messages” later in this section.
263
Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD
eject button to eject the CD-R that is currently
playing in the bottom slot. A beep will sound
and Ejecting Disc appears on the display. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears on
the display. The CD-R can be removed. If
the CD-R is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD
eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD
eject button to eject the CD-R that is currently
playing in the top slot. A beep will sound
and Ejecting Disc appears on the display. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears on
the display. The CD-R can be removed. If
the CD-R is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R automatically pulls back into the
player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject
button for more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
264
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds
have played, the previous MP3 file plays. Press
the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the MP3 files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file appears on the
display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3 file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file appears on the display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
MP3 files on the CD-R in random, rather than
sequential order. To play MP3 files from the CD-R
you are listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album
ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of
MP3 files recorded to the CD-R.
To cancel music navigator while the player is
scanning, press the pushbutton located below the
music navigator label or eject the disc.
The radio may begin playing while it is scanning
the disc in the background. When the scan is
finished, the CD-R begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist.
The current artist playing is shown on the second
line of the display between the arrows. If you
want to listen to MP3 files by another artist,
press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. You will go to the next or previous artist
in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
265
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the
Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of
the buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. The album name
displays on the second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album are played,
the player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R and begins playing MP3
files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the
pushbutton below the Back label to return to
normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains safely inside the radio for future
listening or viewing entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
message showing track or chapter number
appears on display when a disc is in either
slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” appears on the display. If a disc is in
both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD
AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 269
Rear Seat Entertainment System, “Audio/Video
(A/V) Jacks” for more information.
If a MP3 is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen
and use the remote control to navigate the
CD (tracks only) through the remote control.
266
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
267
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available
XM™ Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
268
Navigation/Radio System
Before You Drive
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction.
Technology alone, no matter how advanced,
can never replace your own judgment. See the
Navigation System manual for some tips to
help you reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
works with the vehicle’s audio system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE
system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video
display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio with
CD and DVD on page 235 for more information
on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the
RSE system may or may not work until the
temperature is within the operating range.
The operating range for the RSE system is
above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).
If the temperature of your vehicle is outside of
this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of
the RSE system.
269
Parental Control
Headphones
The Rear Seat Entertainment System may have a
Parental Control feature, depending on which
radio you have. The Parental Control feature will
turn off the video screen and disable all button
operations from the remote control. This feature
can also be used to gain the attention of the
rear passengers that are using headphones.
To enable Parental Control press and hold the
radio power button for more than 2 seconds.
If on, the radio and video screen will turn off.
If a DVD and/or CD is playing, it will be stopped.
A “padlock” icon or a text message may be
displayed on the radio display depending on which
radio you have, while Parental Control is on.
The radio can be turned back on with a single
press of the power button and used normally, but
the RSE system will remain in Parental Control.
To turn off Parental Control, press and hold the
radio power button for more than 2 seconds.
The video screen will return to the state they were
in before Parental Control was turned on. The
“padlock” icon will disappear from the radio display.
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting
or ejecting any disc, an ignition cycle, or pressing
the “play” icon on the radio DVD display menu.
The RSE includes two sets of wireless
headphones that are only dedicated to this
system. These headphones are used to listen to
the DVD radio or an auxiliary device connected to
the RCA jacks. The wireless headphones have
an ON/OFF switch and a volume control.
270
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON.
An indicator light located on the headphones
will illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to OFF
when not in use.
The infrared transmitters are located in the
display below the video screen. The headphones
will shut off automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off
or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. If you
move too far forward or step out of the vehicle,
the headphones will lose the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a
new universal remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the universal
remote control uses a code set of Toshiba®.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
The foam ear pads attached to the headphones
may become worn or damaged if they are
not handled or stored properly. If the foam ear
pads do become damaged or worn out, the pads
can be replaced separately from the headphone
set. It is not necessary to replace the complete
headphone set. The headphone replacement
foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs. See
your dealer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to
loosen, then slide open the battery door
located on the left side of the headphones.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the
door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep
them in a cool, dry place.
271
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical
home entertainment system equipment. The yellow
jack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B)
is for the left audio input. The red jack is (C) for the
right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floor
console. The A/V jacks allow audio or video
signals to be connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to
the RSE system. Adapter connectors or cables
may be required to connect the auxiliary device
to the A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage.
272
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,
connect an external auxiliary device to the
color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power on. If the
video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing
the AUX button on the remote control will
switch the video screen from the DVD player
mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen
to the audio of the connected auxiliary device
by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD and
DVD on page 235 for more information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language
can be changed from the on screen setup menu.
To change any feature, perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button on the
remote control.
2. Use the remote control menu navigation
arrows and the enter button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the display menu button again to
remove the setup menu from the screen.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may
be heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the
rear seat audio system, if your vehicle has
this feature.
The RSE system will always transmit the audio
signal to the wireless headphones, if there is
audio available. See “Headphones” earlier in this
section for more information.
When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliary
input jack, if your vehicle has this feature, or
A/V jacks, the rear seat passengers will be able
to hear audio from the auxiliary device through
the wireless or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers will be able to listen to playback
from this device through the vehicle speakers by
selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
273
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the RSE overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the
RSE overhead console.
2. Turn the screen to the desired position.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console
and press the desired button. Direct sunlight
or very bright light may affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also
affect the function of the remote control.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its
locked position, the screen will remain on, this
is normal, and the DVD will continue to play
through the previous audio source. Use the remote
control power button or eject the disc to turn off
the screen.
The RSE overhead console contains the IR
transmitters for the wireless headphones and
the IR receivers for the remote control. They
are located at the rear of the console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
274
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the
remote control power button can be used to turn
on the video screen display and start the disc.
The radio can also turn on the video screen
display. See Radio with CD and DVD on page 235
for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in
a cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD. This function may
vary for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows):
Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choice that is highlighted in any menu.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video
screen on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the
remote control backlight on. The backlight will
automatically time out after 7 to 10 seconds if no
other button is pressed while the backlight is on.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust
the brightness, screen display mode (normal,
full, or zoom), and display the language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button will operate only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
275
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start
playing a DVD. Press this button while a DVD is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the DVD.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,
you may be able to do slow play by pressing the
pause button then pressing the fast forward button.
The DVD will continue playing in a slow play mode.
You may also, depending on the radio, perform
reverse slow play by pressing the pause button and
then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel
slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the previous track
or chapter. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
276
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the next chapter or track.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing
a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast
reverse button. This button may not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a
DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the
fast forward button. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this feature when
the DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
Battery Replacement
subtitles and to move through subtitle options
when a DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function will vary for each disc.
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door
located on the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on
the inside of the battery compartment.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function will vary for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep
them in a cool, dry place.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds
after inputting a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
277
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be
turned on or in accessory.
The picture does not fill the
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or
it looks stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the remote
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I
push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I left
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the DVD
player will resume playing
where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times the
DVD player will begin to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.
278
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
The DVD display error message depends on
which radio you have. The video screen may
display one of the following:
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message is displayed
when there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message will be
displayed, if the disc is inserted with the disc label
wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message will be
displayed, if the disc is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message will be
displayed, if no disc is present when the EJECT
button is pressed on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near
the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a
clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen,
as damage may result.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft
of your vehicle’s radio. It works by using a
secret code to disable all radio functions whenever
battery power is removed and the radio is placed
in a different vehicle. This feature requires no user
input to be activated. The radio is automatically
armed when it is put into the vehicle for the
first time.
If THEFTLOCK® is activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED.
If this occurs, the radio will need to be returned
to your GM dealer.
279
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The audio steering
wheel controls may be
different depending
on your vehicles
options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted
at the steering wheel.
They include the
following:
xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio
station stored as a favorite.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous track.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press the down arrow
button to end an OnStar® Hands-Free Call or
the Advisor Playback. It will also cancel or hang-up
an incoming Hands-Free Call.
280
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the system. Press and
release this button again, to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press
and hold this button for longer than one second to
initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition”
in the Navigation System manual for more
information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this
button for longer than one second to interact with
the OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the
Navigation System, press this button to initiate
voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter
OnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System on
page 133 in this manual for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, and
AUX jack.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station and stay there.
If you have the navigation system, some of the
audio steering wheel controls work when a DVD is
playing in the navigation radio. See the Navigation
System manual for more information.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada.
You may experience interference with satellite
radio signals, while driving near tall buildings or
through hilly areas, causing the sound to fade
in and out. In addition, driving or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels
may cause loss of the XM™ signal for a
period of time. The radio screen may display
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations will boost the power levels during
the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.
FM
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
281
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD does not play properly or not at
all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft,
lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth
in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
282
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of
your vehicle. This type of antenna is used with
an AM/FM radio, and if your vehicle has the
OnStar® and/or the XM™ Satellite Radio Service
System. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception. If your vehicle
has a sunroof, the performance of the radio
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle
can interfere with the performance of the radio
system and, if your vehicle has this feature,
OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is
not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 284
Defensive Driving ...................................... 284
Drunken Driving ........................................ 285
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 288
Braking ...................................................... 288
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 289
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 291
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 291
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 292
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 293
Steering .................................................... 294
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 297
Passing ..................................................... 297
Loss of Control .......................................... 299
Driving at Night ......................................... 300
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 302
City Driving ............................................... 305
Freeway Driving ........................................ 306
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 307
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 308
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 308
Winter Driving ........................................... 310
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 314
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 315
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 315
Towing ........................................................ 320
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 320
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 320
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 322
283
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 19.
284
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll,
claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
285
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her
same body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
286
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision.
At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this
driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times
greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of
the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee
or number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can
make crash injuries worse, especially injuries
to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that
when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher
than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
287
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 291.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 333.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 178.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
288
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people
drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed
by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace
with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may
not have time to cool between hard stops.
The brakes will wear out much faster if you do
a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with
the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you
are driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder
to push down. If the engine stops, you will still
have some power brake assist. But you will use
it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning
Light on page 180.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 333.
289
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at
each wheel.
290
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may hear the anti-lock pump or motor
operate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but
this is normal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or more of the wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system works the brakes
and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
This light will come
on when your traction
control system is
limiting wheel spin.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best braking.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you
ever need to.
291
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle
to Get It Out on page 315.
The traction control
system can be turned
off by pressing the
traction control button,
located next to the
gear shift lever.
The traction control system can be activated again
by pressing the traction control button.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press
the button, the traction control off light will appear
on the instrument panel cluster. The system will not
turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit
wheel spin. You can turn the system back on at any
time by pressing the button again. If the light does
not come on, you may not have traction control and
your vehicle should be serviced by a dealer.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 333 for more information.
292
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle has this feature. The StabiliTrak®
system is an advanced computer controlled system
that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one
of the vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.
The StabiliTrak® system comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle.
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may
be displayed in the DIC and the traction control
system and StabiliTrak® warning light on the
instrument panel cluster will be on after first driving
the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for
30 seconds. The StabiliTrak® system is off until
the light has turned off. This could take up to
15 minutes. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 198 for more information.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak®
warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
flash when the system is operating. You may also
feel or hear the system working. This is normal.
StabiliTrak® can be turned off using the
traction control button. To disable StabiliTrak®,
press and hold the traction control button for
five seconds. StabiliTrak® can be activated
again by pressing the traction control button.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will
be displayed and the traction control system and
StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on if there is a problem
with the system. When this light and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are on, the system is
not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the
AWD system operates automatically without
any action required by the driver. If the front
drive wheels begin to slip, the rear wheels will
automatically begin to drive the vehicle as
required. Torque is also applied to the rear
wheels during launches. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this
is normal.
This light is located
on the instrument
panel cluster.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the DIC will come on and stay on
to indicate there may be a problem with the drive
system and service is required.
See Service All-Wheel Drive Light on page 189
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 198
for more information.
293
This light will come
on along with the
ALL WHEEL DRIVE
OFF message when
the rear drive system
is overheating.
This light will turn off when the rear drive system
cools down. If this light stays on, it must be
reset. To reset the light, turn the ignition off
and then back again. If the light stays on, see
your dealer for service.
See “All Wheel Drive Off” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 198 for more information.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the
power steering assist system will continue
to operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.
If you lose power steering assist because the
electric power steering system is not functioning,
you can steer, but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction
several times until it stops, or hold the steering
wheel in the stopped position for an extended
amount of time, you may notice a reduced amount
of power steering assist. The normal amount of
power steering assist should return shortly after
a few normal steering movements.
The electric power steering system does not
require regular maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems, such as abnormally
high steering effort for a prolonged period of time,
contact your dealer for service repairs.
294
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and
your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is
the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have
to do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand
too much of those places. You can lose control.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 291
Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®
System on page 292.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease
up on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer
the vehicle the way you want it to go, and
slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you
will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 333.
295
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 288. It is better to remove
as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand. But you
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
296
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead,
then goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that your
vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the worst
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
297
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is
coming up, start to accelerate but stay in
the right lane and do not get too close.
298
Time your move so you will be increasing
speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass,
you will have a running start that more than
makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens
to cause you to cancel your pass, you
need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over
your shoulder, and start your left lane
change signal before moving out of the right
lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead
of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
lane change signal and move back into the
right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or
starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for
the following driver to get ahead of you.
Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what
the driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying
to steer and constantly seek an escape route
or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those conditions.
But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking
skid, your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
system is off, then an acceleration skid is
also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 291 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 292.
299
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second
skid if it occurs.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle
control more limited.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road
to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
300
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
301
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if
rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface
may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned
for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiper and
washer system in good shape and keep your
windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber
start to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction.
302
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or even going through some car washes can
cause problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,
try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if
a lot of water is standing on the road. If you
can see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
303
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly
damage your engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water
can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
304
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not
just your parking lamps — to help make
you more visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle.
Allow yourself more clear room ahead,
and be prepared to have your view
restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 382.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 306.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
305
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
306
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive
at the same speed most of the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway
as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,
you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you
are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many
miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable
clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in GM dealerships all across North America.
They will be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
307
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
308
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
•
{CAUTION:
•
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
•
•
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
309
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 382.
310
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. But you can
turn the traction system off if you ever need to.
You should turn the traction system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow on page 314. Even though your vehicle
has a traction system, you will want to slow
down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the traction system off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to
help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 291
and StabiliTrak® System on page 292.
311
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 289.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
312
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And
check around again from time to time to
be sure snow does not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
313
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transaxle or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires.
If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 315.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 403.
314
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
If your vehicle has traction control, you should
turn the traction control system off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 291. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and
a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little
as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out
after a few tries, it may need to be towed out.
If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 320.
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry,
the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Vehicle Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you
do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
315
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
more information on tires and inflation, see Tires on
page 382 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
316
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 322 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
317
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
318
Certification Label
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires
and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
319
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
320
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 462.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind
a motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment,
many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider
before you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving
on a Long Trip on page 307.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground, or even with
only two of its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components. Do not tow
an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels
will be on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
all of its wheels on the ground. If you have a
two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed with
two of its wheels on the ground. See “Dolly
Towing” following. If you have an all-wheel-drive
vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its
wheels on the ground. It can be towed with the
car carrier equipment.
321
Dolly Towing
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be
towed with two of its wheels on the ground.
To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove
the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed
for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground, or even with
only two of its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components. Do not tow
an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels
will be on the ground.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot
be towed with any of its wheels on the ground.
It can be towed with car carrier equipment.
322
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all
the steps in this section. Ask your dealer
for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
that would not be covered by your warranty.
Always follow the instructions in this section
and check with your dealer for more information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you will be driving.
A good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps your engine and other parts
of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Three important considerations have to do
with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
323
Weight of the Trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, passengers, or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow
a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW
because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 315
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
Your vehicle can tow up to 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has
all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from
the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 460 for more
information.
324
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these
numbers on the Certification/Tire Label at the rear
edge of the driver’s door, or see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 315. Then be sure you do not go
over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you are using a weight-carrying or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue
weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceed
the maximum allowable tongue weight for your
vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
325
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when
loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 lbs
(900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-carrying hitch and sway control of
the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you’re driving.
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch?
If you do, remember to seal the holes when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal
them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from
your exhaust can get into your vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 127. Dirt and
water can, too.
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
326
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able
to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do
not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you have the liftgate open and you pull
a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness or death. See
Engine Exhaust on page 127. To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
• Keep the liftgate closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with
the fan on any speed. This will bring
fresh, outside air into your vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use the climate control setting for
maximum air because it only recirculates
the air inside your vehicle. See Climate
Control System on page 165.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in
mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your
vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you
check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
327
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could
be damaged. Avoid making very sharp
turns while trailering.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead
when you are towing a trailer. And, because you
are a good deal longer, you will need to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move
that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide you.
328
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will not
strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or
other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers.
Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the
bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are seeing
your signal when they are not. It’s important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs
are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
do not shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and
no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in INTERMEDIATE (I)
instead of DRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower
gear. This will minimize heat build-up and extend
the life of your transaxle.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
do the following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift
into PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
329
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you do the following:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
330
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 333
Accessories and Modifications ................... 333
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 334
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 334
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...................................... 335
Fuel ............................................................. 335
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 335
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 335
California Fuel ........................................... 336
Additives ................................................... 336
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 337
Filling the Tank ......................................... 337
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 339
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 340
Hood Release ........................................... 340
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 342
Engine Oil ................................................. 344
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 347
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 349
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 352
Engine Coolant .......................................... 352
Engine Overheating ................................... 355
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ..................................... 357
Cooling System ......................................... 358
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 364
Brakes ...................................................... 365
Battery ...................................................... 368
Jump Starting ............................................ 368
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 374
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 375
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 376
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 376
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps ............................... 378
License Plate Lamp ................................... 380
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 380
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 380
Tires ............................................................ 382
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 383
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 387
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 390
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 391
331
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 396
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 397
Buying New Tires ...................................... 398
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 400
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 400
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 402
Wheel Replacement .................................. 402
Tire Chains ............................................... 403
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 404
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 404
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 406
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ....................................... 407
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 414
Compact Spare Tire .................................. 416
Appearance Care ........................................ 417
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 417
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 418
Leather ...................................................... 420
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 421
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 421
Weatherstrips ............................................ 421
332
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 422
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 422
Finish Care ............................................... 422
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 423
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 424
Tires ......................................................... 425
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 425
Finish Damage .......................................... 425
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 425
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 426
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 426
Vehicle Identification .................................. 427
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 427
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 428
Electrical System ........................................ 428
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 428
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 429
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 429
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 429
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 431
Capacities and Specifications .................... 434
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability
control. Some of these accessories may even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
333
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
CAUTION:
334
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 475.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 88.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 451.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, GM recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 336 for additional information.
335
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 183. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives that
will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits
from forming, allowing your emission control system
to work properly.
336
In most cases, you should not have to add anything
to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only
the minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
337
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
338
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as
possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 422.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 183.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 183.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
339
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
340
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle, to the left of
the brake pedal.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop
from the slot in the hood and return the prop to
its retainer. Then just let the hood down and close
it firmly.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up
on the secondary hood release lever.
341
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood you will see the following:
342
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 349.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 344.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 344.
D. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 365.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 429.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 368.
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 352.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 364.
343
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 342
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
344
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you will need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 434.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range in the
cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 342 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
SAE 5W-30 may not
appear on all caps.
345
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
346
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle. If you are in an area
of extreme cold, where the temperature falls
below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommended
that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil
or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to
use the recommended oil can result in engine
damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This
is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will
be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, you must reset the system
every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light and a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come
on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
347
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a change engine oil light
or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
being turned on, reset the system.
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the
engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
The change engine oil light will flash while the
system is resetting.
3. When the light stops flashing, turn the key
to LOCK.
If the light or message comes back on and stays
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
348
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
local recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 342 for more information on location.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Turn off the engine.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 439 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical
connector.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
349
3. Disconnect the crank case ventilation tube.
4. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding
the air outlet duct in place. Do not pry the
clamps off.
350
5. Remove the air outlet duct.
9. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten
the screws on the clamps that hold the duct
in place.
10. Reconnect the crank case ventilation tube.
11. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical
connector.
{CAUTION:
6. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. To
remove the cover, pull up on the front
and then pull the cover out.
7. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct
for cracks, cuts, and deterioration. The
air outlet duct must be replaced if damaged.
8. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the
air; it helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. If it is not there and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on
the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
351
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid
level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to
the dealership service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
Required Services on page 442, and be sure to
use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 448.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 448.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
352
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 355.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to
−34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at the
first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times
a year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 448 for more information.
353
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side
of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 342 for more
information on location.
354
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at the COLD FILL line. When your engine is warm,
the level should be at the COLD FILL line or a
little higher.
Adding Coolant
Engine Overheating
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
but only when the engine is cool.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 182. There are several
different types of engine overheating messages
that may be displayed in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 198.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
355
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 357 for
information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
356
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 357 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning can indicate a serious
problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If the air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a
traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,
shift to the highest gear while driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about ten minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode lets your vehicle
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, there is a significant loss in power and
engine performance. The temperature gage
indicates an overheat condition exists. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system.
See Engine Oil on page 344.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
357
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank
358
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 357 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
359
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD
FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is cool before you do it.
360
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
361
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including
the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper
radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a
hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow
any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
362
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the
COLD FILL line.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank until
the level reaches the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
6. After driving the vehicle, check the level in the
surge tank again when the cooling system
has cooled down.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
If the coolant is not at the proper level, repeat
Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the pressure cap.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when
the system cools down again, see your dealer.
363
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield or rear window washer
fluid be sure to read the instructions before use.
If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 342
for reservoir location.
364
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 342 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well,
or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you
will have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 178.
365
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 448.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 422.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
366
Brake Pedal Travel
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking system — for example, when your
brake linings wear down and you need new ones
put in — be sure you get new approved GM
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
367
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery.
For battery replacement, see your dealer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual,
see Service and Owner Publications in Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 475.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
368
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 368 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
You must close all doors and the liftgate before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting
the battery, you must press the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter. Failure
to follow this procedure may result in a sounding
alarm. Pressing unlock on the remote keyless
entry transmitter would stop the sounding alarm.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not
a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting
the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
369
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations on each
vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal for that purpose.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located
under the engine
compartment fuse block
cover, and is marked
with a plus (+) symbol
on the cover. To access
the terminal, remove
the fuse block cover.
370
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located in the
front of the engine
compartment, near the
engine oil dipstick.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 342 for more information on the location
of the remote positive (+) terminal and the
engine oil dipstick.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)
or you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts, too.
And do not connect the negative (−) cable
to the negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause sparks.
371
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
372
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Press the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to disarm your
content theft-deterrent system.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original
position.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
373
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this
section. However, there are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 439.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add
enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 448.
374
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant and when to change
it. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 439.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add
enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem; check and have it repaired, if needed.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 448.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 380.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
AWD Differential Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
375
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 340 for more information.
2. Remove the fastener plugs from the top of the
radiator cover/front grill.
3. Gently pull the
radiator cover/front
grill toward you
and pull the
front grill trim bar
away from the
headlamp lens.
The front grill bar is attached to the headlamp
lens with a hidden clip.
376
4. Remove the three headlamp assembly
attachment screws.
5. Pull the radiator cover/front grill toward you
and pull the headlamp assembly up and out
from the vehicle.
A. Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker Lamp
C. Low/High-Beam
Headlamp
D. Turn Signal Lamp
377
6. Press the clip (A)
on the electrical
connector when
replacing the
low-beam or
high-beam bulb, then
pull it straight off.
8. Place the retaining ring over the bulb/socket
and turn it clockwise to tighten it and secure
the bulb/socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the
headlamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
Turn the bulb retaining ring (B)
counterclockwise to remove it and then
pull the bulb assembly straight out.
For all other bulbs, turn the socket
counterclockwise and pull it out from the
headlamp assembly. Pull the bulb straight
out from the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket and
reinstall the socket into the headlamp
assembly by turning it clockwise.
For the low-beam or high-beam bulb, install
the new bulb being sure to align the notches
in the bulb with the notches in the headlamp
assembly.
378
A. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
D. Back-Up Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 107
for more information.
2. Remove the taillamp
screw covers and
then remove the
two screws.
3. Carefully slide the
taillamp assembly
outward to clear the
stud (see arrow)
and then rearward
and away from
the body of
the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
disconnect it from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp housing
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reverse Steps 2 and 3 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
379
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps to the liftgate handle.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
Front Parking Lamp
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Low/High-Beam Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp
Stoplamp/Taillamp
Bulb Number
921
194 N/A
168
1156 N/A
9421330
9007
W5W
1157
1157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp down
through the liftgate opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.
380
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 439 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 449.
Here’s how to replace the windshield wiper blades:
1. Make sure the front wipers are turned off.
2. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the release clip
“click” into place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to
secure the wiper blade into place.
Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement
To replace the rear window wiper blade, do the
following:
1. Make sure that the rear wiper is off.
2. Pull the wiper away from the rear window.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the
connecting point of the blade and the
arm. Then, pull the blade assembly down
toward the glass to remove it from the
wiper arm.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the
connecting point of the blade and the arm.
Then, pull the blade assembly down toward the
glass to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the release clip
“click” into place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to
secure the wiper blade into place.
381
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
CAUTION:
382
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
383
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading
on page 400.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
384
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 416 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 404.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire
or compact spare tire should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire
pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 390.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
385
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
386
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 390.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
387
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 315.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
388
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 315.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 400.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 315.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 315.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 397.
389
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
390
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label
shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they are cold. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to
support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying
capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 315. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 416.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). This system uses radio and
sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, except for the spare tire.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
391
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with
a tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure
telltale when one
or more of your tires
is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
392
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster,
and at the same time a message to check
the pressure in a specific tire will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. The
low tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument
panel cluster and the check tire pressure
message will appear at each ignition cycle until
the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation and displays
see DIC Operation and Displays on page 193
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 198.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on
in cool weather when the vehicle is first started,
and then turn off as you start to drive. This may be
an early indicator that the air pressure in the
tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated to
the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information Label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 315, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle. Also see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a
low tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 396 and Tires on page 382.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle
has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant
can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more
of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. If
the system detects a missing or inoperable sensor,
an error message SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM will be shown on the DIC display. If you
have replaced a tire/wheel assembly without
transferring the TPMS sensors, the error message
will be displayed. Once you re-install the TPMS
sensors, the error message should go off. See your
dealer for service if all TPMS sensors are installed
and the error message comes on and stays on.
393
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of
the TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the
identification codes will need to be matched to
the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are
matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in the
following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s
pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
You will have two minutes to match each tire
and wheel position. If it takes longer than
two minutes to match any tire and wheel position,
the matching process stops and you will need
to start over.
394
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the
engine off.
3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle
information button until the TIRE LOCATIONS
PRESS V TO LEARN message displays.
4. Press the set/reset button to allow the system
to learn the tire positions. The horn will sound
twice to indicate the receiver is ready, and
the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
displays. The TPMS system is ready for the
sensor matching process to begin.
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The
horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds to
sound, confirms that the sensor identification
code has been matched to the tire/wheel
position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a
pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver side rear tire, the tire learning process
ends. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the tire and
loading information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
395
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 397
and Wheel Replacement on page 402 for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 439 for scheduled rotation
intervals.
396
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching Process” under
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 391.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 434.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 404.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
397
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
398
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 383 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 416.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 315,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
399
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
400
See Buying New Tires on page 398 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 333 for
additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
401
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to
give you the longest tire life and best overall
performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment
and tire balancing will not be necessary on
a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual
tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the
other, the alignment may need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your tires and wheels may
need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or
badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks
air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
402
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision
in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 404 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you
or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them
on the front tires.
403
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well
out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
404
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use the jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 150 for more information.
{CAUTION:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain
in the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
405
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If your vehicle has the rear compartment storage
panel/cover, you will have to remove it to access
the load floor. See Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover on page 140 for more information.
To access the spare tire and tools, do the following:
2. Remove the nut retaining the spare tire.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 416 for more information.
4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which are
located on the driver’s side of the rear cargo
area, behind an access door. Pull out the
access door to reach them.
1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the
vehicle and set it aside.
406
5. Remove the
wing-bolt holding
the jack and
then remove it.
6. Remove the hook and loop fastener straps
holding the bag containing the wheel wrench.
Remove the wheel wrench from the bag.
7. Extend the socket portion of the wrench from
the handle.
1. Loosen all
five plastic caps
by turning the
wheel wrench
counterclockwise.
Do not try to remove
plastic caps from
the cover or
center cap.
2. Pull the cover or center cap away from
the wheel.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
You must take off the wheel cover or center cap,
if the vehicle has one, to reach the wheel bolts.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt
head and turn the wheel wrench clockwise.
That will raise the lift head a little.
407
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is
in the correct position or you may damage your
vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
With the jack head positioned correctly on the
metal jacking flange, it should look like this
from underneath.
6. Find the arrow on the plastic lower body
panel. Position the jack head under the
metal jacking flange and not the plastic
lower body panel.
408
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the
jack you could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower
body panel.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
409
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a flat
tire. If it is used for anything else, you or
others could be badly injured or killed if
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
410
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for
the road tire to clear the ground.
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
11. Remove any rust
or dirt from the
wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
10. Remove the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time.
The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
CAUTION:
(Continued)
12. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
411
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 434
for wheel nut torque specification.
13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
412
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 434 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
15. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence,
as shown.
When reinstalling the wheel cover or center cap
on the full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps
hand snug with the aid of the wheel wrench and
tighten them with the wheel wrench an additional
one-quarter of a turn.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
in the cargo area until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
16. Lower the jack all the way and remove the
jack from under the vehicle.
17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel
wrench.
413
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
To store the flat or spare tire and tools, do the
following:
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.
2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps to
secure the bag to the fully collapsed jack.
3. Install the jack in
the left side panel
of cargo area
and secure with
the wing bolt.
4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side
of the floor compartment.
414
6. Remove the cap, if your vehicle has one,
from the center of the load floor. Position
the rod through the hole. Replace the
rear compartment storage panel/cover and/or
table load floor over the wheel stow rod
through the hole in the floor.
7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on
the load floor with the threaded wheel stow
rod sticking up through the center hole of
the wheel.
8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and
tighten.
5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the
spare tire bracket. The final position of the
wheel stow rod must be turned to the farthest
forward position.
9. Install the rear compartment storage
panel/cover in the middle position. See
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover
on page 140 for more information.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size
tire as soon as you can.
415
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to
65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have
the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the
spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
416
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use
tire chains on your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended.
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any
accidental over-spray from other surfaces
immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner
directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
417
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior
and does not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
418
Fabric/Carpet
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and
painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and
stains very well.
If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux® suede fabric,
follow the listed procedures except do not use any
solvents or dry cleaning products.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the
cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can, before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if
stains are stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area immediately
or it will set.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft white
cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should
not drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the
cloth each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned
area with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area
to make sure the cleaner does not affect the
color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, soft
white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a
clean, soft white cloth. Do not apply spray
directly to the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the
cloth each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned
area with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up
with the club soda water instructions given
earlier in this section.
419
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Leather
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee,
tea, milk, fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate,
vomit, urine, and blood can be removed using
the club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or
urine, treat the area with a water and baking soda
solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to
1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned
with an approved GM cleaner and a clean,
white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner
instructions described earlier.
420
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 448.
421
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 422.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 426. Do not use cleaning agents
that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or
abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed
promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or
they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
422
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 426.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
423
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
424
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
425
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
426
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
It appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can
see it if you look through the windshield from
outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels
and the certificates of title and registration.
427
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove
box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
428
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 88.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, have it fixed.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on
the passenger’s side of the center console,
to the left of the glove box near the floor.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by fuses and circuit breakers.
This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload
and fire caused by electrical problems.
Your vehicle has an underhood fuse block and an
instrument panel fuse block.
To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, and
relays, refer to the Fuse Usage Chart on the
inside surface of the fuse panel door.
Remove the console cover to access the
fuse block.
429
Fuses
Fuses
430
Usage
1
Sunroof
2
Rear Seat Entertainment
3
Rear Wiper
4
Usage
9
Automatic Occupant
Sensing Module
10
Power Mirrors
11
Passenger’s Side Turn Signal
12
Amplifier
13
Steering Wheel Illumination
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
14
Infotainment
Liftgate
15
Climate Control System,
Remote Function Actuator
5
Airbags
16
Canister Vent
6
Heated Seats
17
Radio
7
Driver’s Side Turn Signal
18
Cluster
8
Door Locks
19
Ignition Switch
Fuses
Usage
20
Body Control Module
21
OnStar®
22
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Dimmer
23
Interior Lights
Relays
RAP RLY
REAR
DEFOG RLY
Usage
Retained Accessory Power Relay
Rear Defogger Relay
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
PWR WNDW
Power Windows
PWR SEATS
Power Seats
EMPTY
The engine compartment fuse block is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment.
Empty
Misc.
PLR
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Usage
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 342
for more information on location.
Fuse Puller
431
Fuses
432
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
Cooling Fan 2
18
Even Coils, Injectors
2
Cooling Fan 1
19
Odd Coils, Injectors
3
Auxiliary Power
20
Emission Device 2
4
Not Used
21
Spare
5
Spare
22
Powertrain Control Module, Ignition
6
Spare
23
Transmission
7
Anti-lock Brake System
24
Mass Airflow Sensor
8
Air Conditioning Clutch
25
Airbag Display
9
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
26
Spare
10
Daytime Running Lamp 2
27
Stoplamp
11
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
28
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
12
Passenger’s Side Park Lamp
29
Driver’s Side High-Beam
13
Horn
30
Battery Main 3
14
Driver’s Side Park Lamp
32
Spare
15
Starter
33
Engine Control Module, Battery
16
Electronic Throttle Control,
Engine Control Module
34
Transmission Control Module,
Battery
17
Emission Device 1
35
Trailer Park Lamp
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
36
Front Wiper
54
Climate Control System Blower
37
Driver’s Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
57
Battery Main 1
63
Megafuse
38
Spare
39
Fuel Pump
40
Not Used
31
Ignition Main
41
All-Wheel Drive
46
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
42
Regulated Voltage Control
47
Powertrain
43
Passenger’s Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
51
Spare
55
Crank
44
Spare
56
Fan 1
45
Front, Rear Washer
48
Rear Defogger
58
Passenger’s Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
49
Anti-lock Brake System Motor
59
50
Battery Main 2
Driver’s Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
52
Daytime Running Lamps
60
Fan 3
53
Fog Lamps
61
Fan 2
62
Fuel Pump
Relays
Usage
433
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 448 for more information.
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant
caution label located under the hood.
See your dealer for more information.
10.5 qt
9.9 L
4.0 qt
3.8 L
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Front-Wheel Drive
20.5 gal
77.6 L
All-Wheel Drive
16.6 gal
62.8 L
Transaxle Fluid
4.1 qt
3.9 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
434
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
3.4L V6
F
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 436
Introduction ............................................... 436
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 436
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 437
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 437
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 439
Additional Required Services ..................... 442
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 443
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 444
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 445
At Least Once a Month ............................. 445
At Least Once a Year ............................... 446
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 448
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 449
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 450
Maintenance Record .................................. 451
435
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
436
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
437
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 315.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 335.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 439 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 442 and
Maintenance Footnotes on page 443 for further
information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your
own maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job. If you have any
doubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to
have a qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
438
If you want to purchase service information,
see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 475.
Owner Checks and Services on page 444 tells
you what should be checked, when to check it,
and what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 448 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 449.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use
of genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light and/or
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®
dealer has GM-trained service technicians who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system.
439
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 347 for information on the Engine Oil
Life System and resetting the system.
When the change engine oil light and/or
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
440
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
light/message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the
light/message comes on 10 months or more
since the last service or if the light/message
has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 344. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 347. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 349. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 396 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a
Month on page 445.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
•
441
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 349.
Change automatic transaxle fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
442
25,000
(40 000)
•
50,000
(80 000)
•
75,000
(120 000)
•
100,000
(160 000)
•
125,000
(200 000)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake
parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension
and steering system for damaged, loose, or
missing parts, signs of wear. Visually check
constant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle
seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and
all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring
anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,
rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges. More
frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
443
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle
is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.
This service can be complex; you should
have your dealer perform this service. See
Engine Coolant on page 352 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear.
444
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked.
Add fluid if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with
these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed
at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants
are added to your vehicle, make sure they are
the proper ones, as shown in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 448.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood
checks at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper
oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 344
for further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper
level can cause damage to your engine
not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 390. Check to
make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 404.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life
System service notification. Check the tires for
wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 396.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 352 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and
add the proper fluid if necessary.
445
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 122.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
446
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 122.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to
turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or others
could be injured and property could be
damaged. Make sure there is room in front
of your vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at
once should the vehicle begin to move.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
447
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 344.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant
on page 352.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Automatic
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
Transaxle
in Canada 22689186). See Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 352.
448
Usage
Key Lock
Cylinders
Carrier
Assembly –
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module)
Transfer
Case (Power
Transfer Unit)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
VERSATRAK® Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
in Canada 88901045).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
22676970
A1627C
Engine Oil Filter
25010792
PF47
Part
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
15781507
CF137
Replacement Battery
15104967
75-6YR
Spark Plugs
12568387
41-101
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)
22703508
—
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm)
22703507
—
Rear – 15.2 inches (38.6 cm)
19120327
—
Windshield Wiper Blades
449
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.4L V6 Engine
450
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 436.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 444 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
451
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
452
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
453
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
454
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 456
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 456
Online Owner Center ................................. 459
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 460
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 460
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 461
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 462
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 466
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders ............................ 469
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 470
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 474
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 474
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 474
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 474
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 475
455
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur.
If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your
concern cannot be resolved by the dealership
without further help, in the U.S., contact the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact
General Motors of Canada Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number
in order to give your inquiry prompt attention.
Please have the following information available to
give the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This
is available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument
panel and visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember
that your concern will likely be resolved at
a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first if you have a concern.
456
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
using the toll-free telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.
General Motors reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
457
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
458
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and
forms with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
459
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
460
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
461
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
462
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for
the customer to get to the nearest service
station (about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in
Canada). Service to provide diesel may
be restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service is
provided. Lock-out service will be covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. If your vehicle will not start,
Roadside Assistance will arrange to have
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
dealership. In the U.S., replacement keys made
at the customer’s expense will be covered
within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
tire, installation of the tire in good condition will
be covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting
your choice of either the most direct route or
the most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with
any helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as
possible, but it is best to allow three weeks
before your planned departure date.
Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
463
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to
be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
464
• Alternative Service: There may be times,
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100
upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are
the responsibility of the driver.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. U.S. customers call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
465
Courtesy Transportation
Scheduling Service Appointments
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and
advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
466
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience
by providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty
repairs, and public transportation is used as
‘shuttle service,’ the reimbursement is limited
to the associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
467
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle
is kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are
responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
All program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
468
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems
that monitor and control several aspects of the
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if the vehicle
has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control
the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some
information may be stored during regular operations
to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other
information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly
called Event Data Recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about
the condition of the vehicle and how it was
operated, such as data related to engine speed,
brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving
safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record
sounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
469
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
470
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related
failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance
policy terms. Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
471
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 462 for
more information.
472
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a card
from the tow truck operator or write down the
driver’s name, the service’s name, and the
phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy
number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If they
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends that you
take an active role in its repair. If you have
a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you
must live with the repair. Depending on your
policy limits, your insurance company may
initially value the repair using aftermarket parts.
Discuss this with your repair professional,
and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be obligated
to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does
not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the repair
and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
473
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
474
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly
hope you will notify General Motors. Please call
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference
number can be obtained by contacting your
General Motors dealer or by calling
1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
This reference number is needed to order
the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US +
Processing Fee
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit
repair service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
475
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule
for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +
Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +
Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
476
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices
are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 333
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 164
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 89
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 336
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 428
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 349
Air Conditioning ........................................... 165
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 175
Readiness Light ....................................... 174
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module
(SDM) ...................................................... 469
Airbag System ............................................... 72
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 89
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 80
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 82
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 88
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 79
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 80
Airbag System (cont.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 78
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 75
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 374
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 293
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ....................... 189
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 289
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 180
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 424
Care of Safety Belts ................................ 421
Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 426
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 422
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 417
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 418
Finish Care .............................................. 422
Finish Damage ......................................... 425
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 421
Leather .................................................... 420
Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 425
Tires ........................................................ 425
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 425
477
Appearance Care (cont.)
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................
Ashtray(s) ....................................................
Audio System(s) ..........................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................
Radio with CD ................................ 219,
Radio with CD and DVD ..........................
Setting the Time .............................. 216,
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
Automatic Headlamp System .......................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
478
426
422
421
423
165
215
280
282
282
269
224
235
217
279
281
160
352
119
B
Battery ........................................................
Electric Power Management .....................
Run-Down Protection ...............................
Battery Warning Light ..................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................
Emergencies ............................................
Parking ....................................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Brakes ........................................................
Braking .......................................................
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ...........
License Plate Lamps ................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps ..............................
Buying New Tires ........................................
368
162
163
178
307
289
291
122
178
365
288
291
114
375
376
376
380
380
378
398
C
Calibration .......................................... 129, 131
California Fuel ............................................. 336
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 334
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 434
Carbon Monoxide .............. 107, 127, 310, 322
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 421
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 282
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 282
Cargo Lamp ................................................ 162
Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 143
CD, MP3 ............................................ 253, 260
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 137
Chains, Tire ................................................. 403
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 183
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 340
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 426
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49
Infants and Young Children ........................ 46
Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 57
Older Children ........................................... 43
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position .......................................... 64
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................. 66
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 53
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 165
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 424
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 422
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 418
Finish Care .............................................. 422
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 417
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 421
Leather .................................................... 420
Tires ........................................................ 425
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 425
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 422
Weatherstrips ........................................... 421
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 423
479
Climate Control System ............................... 165
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 169
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 169
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 470
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39
Compact Spare Tire .................................... 416
Compass ............................................ 129, 131
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 111
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 288
Convenience Net ......................................... 143
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 182
Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 181
Heater, Engine ......................................... 118
Cooling System ........................................... 358
Cruise Control ............................................. 155
Cruise Control Light .................................... 188
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 137
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 466
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 460
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 460
480
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..............
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ......
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors ..................................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
456
461
474
474
474
462
475
D
Daytime Running Lamps .............................
Defensive Driving ........................................
Delayed Locking ..........................................
Disc, MP3 .......................................... 253,
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
Dome Lamp ................................................
159
284
105
260
334
161
Door
Ajar Light ................................................. 190
Delayed Locking ...................................... 105
Locks ....................................................... 104
Power Door Locks ................................... 105
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 105
Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 106
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 25
Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 192
DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 193
DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 207
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 198
Driving
At Night ................................................... 300
City .......................................................... 305
Defensive ................................................. 284
Drunken ................................................... 285
Freeway ................................................... 306
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 308
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 302
Driving (cont.)
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 315
Winter ...................................................... 310
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 269
E
Electric Power Management ........................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................
Battery .....................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ..........................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .....
Coolant ....................................................
Coolant Heater .........................................
162
428
431
429
429
429
349
368
187
183
352
118
481
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 182
Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 181
Drive Belt Routing .................................... 450
Engine Compartment Overview ................ 342
Exhaust ................................................... 127
Oil ........................................................... 344
Oil Life System ........................................ 347
Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 357
Overheating ............................................. 355
Reduced Power Light ............................... 188
Starting .................................................... 116
Entry Lighting .............................................. 161
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 469
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
482
349
425
150
153
404
Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 404
Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 414
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ................................. 352
Windshield Washer .................................. 364
Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 188
Fog Lamps .................................................. 160
Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 17
Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14
Fuel ............................................................ 335
Additives .................................................. 336
California Fuel .......................................... 336
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 339
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 337
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 337
Gage ....................................................... 191
Gasoline Octane ...................................... 335
Gasoline Specifications ............................ 335
Low Warning Light ................................... 192
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 431
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 429
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 429
Windshield Wiper ..................................... 429
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Garment Hooks ...........................................
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Gate Ajar Light ............................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
182
191
173
173
137
335
335
190
137
461
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 150
Head Restraints ............................................ 13
Headlamps .................................................. 158
Automatic Headlamp System .................... 160
Bulb Replacement .................................... 375
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 159
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 153
Headlamps (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 376
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 376
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 152
On Reminder ........................................... 159
Heated Seats ................................................ 10
Heater ......................................................... 165
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 189
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 308
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 308
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 340
Release ................................................... 340
Horn ............................................................ 150
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 24
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 115
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 390
483
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 148
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 161
Cluster ..................................................... 172
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 368
K
Keyless Entry System ................................... 96
Keys ............................................................. 95
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ...................
Cargo ......................................................
Dome .......................................................
Electric Power Management .....................
484
383
163
162
161
162
Lamps (cont.)
Fog .......................................................... 160
Map ......................................................... 162
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 57
License Plate Lamps ................................... 380
Liftgate ........................................................ 107
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 174
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 180
Battery Warning ....................................... 178
Brake System Warning ............................. 178
Change Engine Oil ................................... 187
Cruise Control .......................................... 188
Door Ajar ................................................. 190
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 181
Fog Lamp ................................................ 188
Gate Ajar ................................................. 190
Highbeam On .......................................... 189
Low Fuel Warning .................................... 192
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 183
Oil Pressure ............................................. 186
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 175
Light (cont.)
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ..............
Reduced Engine Power ............................
Safety Belt Reminder ...............................
Security ...................................................
Service All-Wheel-Drive ............................
Service Vehicle Soon ...............................
TCS Warning Light ..................................
Tire Pressure ...........................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ...
Lighting
Entry ........................................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
Locks
Delayed Locking ......................................
Door ........................................................
Lockout Protection ...................................
Power Door .............................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......
Rear Door Security Locks ........................
Loss of Control ...........................................
174
188
173
188
189
191
181
182
181
161
315
106
105
104
106
105
105
106
299
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 192
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 138
Lumbar
Manual Controls ......................................... 10
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ....................
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................
At Least Once a Month ............................
At Least Once a Year ..............................
Introduction ..............................................
Maintenance Footnotes ............................
Maintenance Record ................................
Maintenance Requirements ......................
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....
Owner Checks and Services ....................
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......
Scheduled Maintenance ...........................
Using .......................................................
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............
442
445
445
446
436
443
451
436
449
444
448
439
437
437
485
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 183
Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10
Manual Reclining Seatbacks .......................... 11
Manual Seats .................................................. 8
Map Lamps ................................................. 162
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 198
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass .............................................. 131
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar® and Compass ......................... 129
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 129
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 129
Outside Convex Mirrors ............................ 132
Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 132
MP3 ................................................... 253, 260
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 459
N
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 269
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 114
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 449
486
O
Odometer .................................................... 173
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 173
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 297
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 187
Engine ..................................................... 344
Pressure Light .......................................... 186
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 347
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43
Online Owner Center ................................... 459
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 133
Other Warning Devices ................................ 150
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 169
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 164
Outside
Convex Mirrors ........................................ 132
Power Mirrors .......................................... 132
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ....................................... 357
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 444
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Q
Paint, Damage ............................................ 425
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 123
Shifting Out of ......................................... 125
Parking
Brake ....................................................... 122
Over Things That Burn ............................ 126
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 175
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 169
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 82
Passing ....................................................... 297
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 112
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 113
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 164
Door Locks .............................................. 105
Reduced Engine Light .............................. 188
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 116
Seat ............................................................ 9
Windows .................................................. 110
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 105
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 23
R
Radios ........................................................ 215
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 282
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 282
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................ 269
Radio with CD ................................ 219, 224
Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 235
Setting the Time .............................. 216, 217
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 279
Understanding Reception ......................... 281
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..... 140
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 106
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39
Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 142
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 269
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 155
487
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with Compass .......................................... 131
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 129
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 129
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 129
Reclining Seatbacks, Manual ......................... 11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 448
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 320
Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 188
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 96
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................... 97
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................ 407
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 406
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 380
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 474
General Motors ........................................ 474
United States Government ....................... 474
488
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 90
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 91
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 116
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety
Belts .......................................................... 35
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 462
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 315
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 450
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 128
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 174
Pretensioners ............................................. 42
Reminder Light ........................................ 173
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 421
Driver Position ........................................... 25
Safety Belts (cont.)
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 24
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts ....................................................... 23
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 19
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 439
Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9
Head Restraints ......................................... 13
Heated Seats ............................................. 10
Manual ........................................................ 8
Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ...................... 11
Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14
Power Seat ................................................. 9
Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 17
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 64
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 66
Security Light .............................................. 188
Service ........................................................ 333
Accessories and Modifications .................. 333
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ......................................... 335
All-Wheel-Drive Light ................................ 189
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 334
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 334
Engine Soon Light ................................... 183
Publications Ordering Information ............. 475
Vehicle Soon Light ................................... 191
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 88
Setting the Time ................................. 216, 217
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 425
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 123
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 125
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 152
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................. 416
Installing .................................................. 407
489
Spare Tire (cont.)
Removing ................................................ 406
Storing ..................................................... 414
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 434
Speedometer ............................................... 173
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 17
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 292
Starting Your Engine ................................... 116
Steering ...................................................... 294
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 280
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 151
Storage
Garment Hooks ........................................ 137
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ................... 137
Convenience Net ..................................... 143
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 137
Glove Box ................................................ 137
Luggage Carrier ....................................... 138
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover .......................................... 140
Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 142
Table ....................................................... 142
490
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 314
Sun Visors .................................................. 110
Sunroof ....................................................... 144
T
Table ...........................................................
Tachometer .................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up
Lamps ..................................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Tire
Pressure Light ..........................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ...............................................
142
173
378
181
279
111
111
112
113
151
182
382
424
Tires (cont.)
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
Cleaning ..................................................
Compact Spare Tire .................................
Different Size ...........................................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Pressure Monitor System .........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .....
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
398
403
404
425
416
400
404
390
396
407
391
407
406
414
383
387
400
402
402
397
320
322
320
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..............................
Control System Warning Light ..................
StabiliTrak® System .................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...................
Trip Odometer .............................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
291
181
292
352
119
173
152
151
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 281
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 400
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 288
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 315
Service Soon Light ................................... 191
Symbols ...................................................... 5
491
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ..........................................
Service Parts Identification Label ..............
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ..........................................................
Ventilation Adjustment ..................................
Visors ..........................................................
469
427
428
207
169
110
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 171
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 198
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 150
Other Warning Devices ............................ 150
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 402
Different Size ........................................... 400
Replacement ............................................ 402
492
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 53
Windows ..................................................... 109
Power ...................................................... 110
Windshield
Washer .................................................... 154
Washer Fluid ........................................... 364
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 380
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 423
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 429
Wipers ..................................................... 153
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 155
Winter Driving ............................................. 310
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 267
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 437